Home

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual -...Allen

1. Simplified Schematic nee WF 5V Isolated DC 0 o enoo lol e fino o o o Dco IN 0 o Wiring pci o enD E GR INT o oo De t C GND2 E sE nz M GND l IN GND 0 5 WV E Source Input Wiring s a 7 ENS Na E K S ui Cp N4 l 4 DC50 o o o4 8ND5 C a WET INS o DC 5 GND i DCS o GO GND 6 gu sa N 6 o DC 6 t GND 7 Je 15 N 7 Jumper Bar Cut to Length GND 8 CD 178 N 8 ControlLogix Display anos Teo w EDI NS Backplane GND 10 O 22 n 8 N40 O o Interface GND 11 ICD 24 23 N 11 o o Nonisolated GND 12 l 2 4 N 12 o oO am Input m Irin Wiring GND 13 28 27 N 23 O O 3 GND 14 z 29 D N 14 O Oo Additional jumper bars may be purchased Vinc E 2 z ie m by using catalog number 1756 JMPR NotUsed E xt E o DC I I Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 IB16l 4 DC INPUT Attribute 1756 IB161 3 Inputs 16 individually isolated 581012345670 Voltage category 12 24V DC sink source ST 8 9 1011121314 15K 6 Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Input voltage nom 24V DC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 1 ms max filter time User selectable filter tim
2. Simplified Schematic aa Isolated Wiring T 45V 12 0 o 120 e NO o o ol INO 24 ga s ep Exil rt 122 o 122 ges sii IN2 o o o 12 L2 0 gt S VINE 12 3 ge 75 N 3 C i i DE L s V4 C 124 o 124 gr 9 N4 o o o L4 GND L2 5 e E N 5 12 6 g sg N 6 ControlLogix Display Jumper Bar L27 aye 5 ED bod Cut to Length L2 8 Elis 1714 N 8 Backplane 12 9 E20 19 N 9 Interface A L2 10 ep n N10 o o L2 11 z zg N 11 Nonisolated L2 12 ay 26 25 N 12 Additional jumper bars may be purchased Wiring 1243 Eae 27 N 13 o o e by using catalog number 1756 JMPR L2 14 p 30 29 4 N 14 L2 15 E32 31 N 15 ooe 12 0 L2 15 D 34 39 Not Used rd Not Used Cpjae ss CD Not Used d L1 E Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 IM161 4 AC INPUT Attribute 1756 IM161 3 Inputs 16 individually isolated 51012345670 Voltage category 240V AC K METODO NEN Operating voltage range 159 265V AC 6 47 63 Hz Input voltage nom 240V AC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 10 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 8 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 9
3. Technical Specifications 1756 1H161l Attribute Inrush current max Module specific Information 1756 1H161 250 mA Chapter 7 Input impedance max 48 67 kQ 146V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input to input Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4 Enclosure type 0 90 146V DC 50 C 122 F 12 channels on 90 132V DC 55 C 131 F 14 channels on 90 125V DC 60 C 140 F 16 channels on 90 146V DC Q 30 C 86 F 16 channels on 2 Maximum wire size requires ex None open style ended housing catalog number 1756 TBE B Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 IH161 Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60
4. 1756 0A16l Isolated Wiring 5V L1 0 E j 0 OL 19 1 l2 OUTO O 120 5 i ut HED Ea ours l ME H2 0 12 s e ou2 O u2 WA 3 TED 7p ours AY L4 O 14 lio oE ours O u4 box cT OUTO us Cp ne ours ControlLogix Backplane Interface Erg g 14 B E L Display i mes Mil Jumper Bar Cut to Length L1 8 GQ 18 v OUT 8 Surge Current Chart Hs cp ipd ae L1 10 oz 28 OUT 10 L1 11 qa zg OUT 11 N lated 20A Wing L1 12 26 25 OUT 12 e L1 13 p 2s zz amp OUT 13 y L1 14 E 3 29 CD OUTM e S 115 OE 32 a8 OUT 15 e i Fs ZI e R Has D 34 3q Not Used Continuous 30 C 86 F Not Used D36 359 Not Used o 2A Y 1A 4 H Additional jumper bars 0 43 ms may be purchased by Time using catalog number 1756 JMPR Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 0A16l Q AC OUTPUT Attribute 1756 0A161 3 Outputs 6 individually isolated 581012345670 Voltage category 20 240V AC K Noe ted Operating voltage range 74 265V AC 8 47 63 Hz Output delay time OFF to ON 9 3 ms 60 Hz 1 ms 50 Hz ON to OFF 9 3 ms 60 Hz 11 ms 50 Hz Current draw 5 1V 300 mA Current draw 24V 2 5 mA Power dissipation max 5 5 W 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation ma
5. Dcos Sat u e J E DC 0 Any eo _ A4 E SUED con D OUT 0 s AX i i OUT 1 VEG E KD KD i D DC 0 OUT 2 ControlLogix Backplane Interface T 0 Ol oura Display OUT 0 i 7 Surge Current Chart i i Surge ou ix 4 Group 1 T MS Z Continuous 60 C 140 F DC 1 OUT 6 2A LLL 3 DC 1 OUT 7 0 9 OUT RTN OUT 1 i Time Mu C Daisy Chain Other RTBs DC COM Technical Specifications 1756 0B8 e DC OUTPUT Attribute 1756 0B8 3 Outputs 8 electronically fused individually isolated ST0123456706 K Voltage category 12 24V DC source 6 Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Output delay time OFF to ON 1 ms max ON to OFF 2ms max Current draw 5 1V 250 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 4 7 W 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 6 03 BTU hr Off state leakage current max mA per point On state voltage drop max 2V DC Q 2A Current per point max 2A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 6 A Q 55 C 131 F linear derating 0A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 4 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 194 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 OB8 Attribute Load curren
6. Simplified Schematic 1756 IA8D p H 5V x 1 M or E Not Used lige KD L1 0 Loss of Field Power peal Ci XAR Input Other RTBs 12 0 IED ED io Un or E e Display lt a I e GND d 20 DIDM 4sy LontrolLogix Group 0 12 0 H T IN 2 Group ZKko 172W ue Backplane Interface KD KD 0 5 Resistor Ak Open Wire da ID CD s 4 Display 2 1 aan IN 4 nr KB Eo ControlLogix 12 1 ie iS IN 5 47 kQ 2W Backplane Interface euo ie 5 5 Resistor roup L2 1 IN 6 se L2 IN 7 DR L2 1 Io IB L1 1 Loss of Field Pow L2 X L1 Diagnostics 1756 IA8D Attribute 1756 IA8D Open wire Off state leakage current 1 5 mA min Loss of power Transition range 46 85V AC Timestamp of diagnostics 1 ms Technical Specifications 1756 IA8D ACINPUT 3 Attribute 1756 IA8D ST01234567 Qo Inputs 8 diagnostic 4 points group AT01234567 K Voltage category 120V AC Operating voltage range 79 132V AC 47 63 Hz DIAGNOSTIC Input voltage nom 120V AC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 10 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 8 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 100 mA Current draw 24V 3mA Power dissipation max 4 5 W 60 C 140 F Ther
7. An open wire condition on any point sets the bit for that point in the open wire word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word 41458 94 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules multicast fault and status data Between Output Modules to any owner listening controllers and Controllers All output modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions The table lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic input module Tag Description Module fault Word This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules Fuse Blown Word This word indicates a point or group fuse blown on the module It s tag name is FuseBlown See Electronic Fusing on page 85 for more information Field power Loss Word This word indicates loss of field power to a point on the module It s tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is available on 1756 0A8D only See Field power Loss Detection on Output Modules on page 92 for more information No Load Word This word indicates a loss of a load from a point on
8. IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data 48 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 Disabled Keying Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a module Other attributes such as data size and format ate considered and must be acceptable before I O communication is established With Disabled Keying I O communication may occur with a module other than the type specified in the I O Configuration tree with unpredictable results We generally do not recommend using Disabled Keying Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying if used incorrectly this option can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss If you use Disabled Keying you must take full responsibility for understanding whether the module being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the application EXAMPLE In the following scenario Disable Keying prevents 1 0 communication e The module configuration is for a 1756 IA16 digital input module The physical module is a 1756 IF16 analog input module In this case communication is prevented because the analog module rejects the data formats that the digital module configuration requests Module Co
9. Cat No Page Cat No Page 1756 IA8D 134 1756 0A16 188 1756 IA16 137 1756 0A16l 191 1756 IA161 140 1756 0B8 194 1756 IA32 143 1756 OB8EI 197 1756 IB16 146 1756 OB8 200 1756 IB16D 149 1756 0B16D 203 1756 IB16l 152 1756 OB16E 206 1756 IB32 155 1756 OB161l 209 1756 1016 158 1756 OB16IS 212 1756 IG16 161 1756 0B32 215 1756 1H161 164 1756 0C8 218 1756 IM 161 167 1756 0616 221 1756 IN16 170 1756 0H81 224 1756 IV16 173 1756 ON8 227 1756 IV32 176 1756 OV16E 230 1756 0A8 179 1756 OV32E 233 1756 OA8D 182 1756 OW16l 236 1756 OA8E 185 1756 OX8I 239 RTB Types each RTB comes with housing Wire the RTB with a 3 2 mm 1 8 in maximum flat bladed screwdriver before installing it onto the module These are the three types of RTBs Cage Clamp catalog number 1756 TBCH NEMA Clamp catalog number 1756 TBNH Spring Clamp catalog number 1756 TBSH or TBS6H Cage Clamp Follow these steps to wire a cage clamp 1 Strip 9 5 mm 3 8 in maximum length of wire 2 Insert the wire into the open terminal on the side Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 101 Chapterb X Install the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 3 Turn the screw clockwise to close the terminal on the wire lt g Strain Relief
10. D Daisy Chain to Other RTBs DC COM Attribute i Outputs 8 4 points group Voltage category 48V DC source Operating voltage range 30 60V DC Output delay time OFF to ON 1 ms max ON to OFF 2 ms max Current draw 5 1V 165 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 4 9 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 16 71 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 1 mA per poin On state voltage drop max 2VDC 2A Current per point max 2A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 8A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 4 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 1 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 2 mA per poin Publica ion 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 Technical Specifications 1756 0C8 Attribute Isolation voltage Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0C8 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested at 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 2 North American temperature code T4 IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type No
11. 1756 0B16IS Isolated Sourcing _ Output Wiring DC O DC 0 4 o DC 0 p2 ouro oO DC 0 De 1 Hoa slept jours 5V DC2 6 0 DC 2 eae sk QUT 2 o DC2 DC 3 le zi OUT 3 SZAN DC 4 a oJ OUT 4 sin Sinking Output Wiring DC 5 Hah na OUTS DC 6 Ho DC6 E s OUT 6 o DC6 ControlLogix Backplane Interface a DC 7 Cpie ss ep OUT 7 umper Bar DC 8 Elis if OUT 8 Display Cut to Length DC 9 ff 19 OUT 9 Nonisolated DC 10 T amp 5 22 zjep OUT 10 Sourcing DC 1 Tey 24 S 0UT 1 Output Surge Current Chart rna DC 12 4 26 a21 QUT 12 Wiring Bode DC 13 Ez of OUT 13 4A DC 14 4 E30 2f 0UT 14 DC 15 HE aid OUT 15 E DC 4 Oo DC 15 34 33 oD Not Used 5 Continuous 30 C 86 F a NotUsed HE 36 3s EDT Not Used B 2A l DCI Continuous 60 C 140 F p 7 Additional jumper Daisy Chain to Other RTBs bars may be purchased by using 0 10 ms catalog number Time 1756 JMPR CQ DC OUTPUT 3 51012345679 K ST 8 9 10111213 1415 212 Technical Specifications 1756 0B16IS Attribute 1756 0B16lS Outputs 16 individually isolated 8
12. A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A A A fuse blown field power loss no load or output verify condition sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word Group 1 Group 0 Fuse Blown Word 4 A blown fuse for any point and group sets the bit for that point and group in the Fuse Blown Word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word eri Group 0 111 1 Field power Loss Word 1 1756 OA8D only A loss of field power from any group sets the bit for that point in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word No Load Word 1 A no load condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the no load word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word pe 34 Output Verify Word 1 An output verify condition for any point sets the bit for that point in the output verify word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word 41457 96 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter 5 Introduction Install the 1 0
13. 93 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers acen a ute eats eur RP pe C HR P RH 93 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and ControlletScs o ovS RP eA S e ENT Nes 95 Chapter 5 Introductions ce ee e eoe ef AAA UE Ida 97 Install the I O Module eeeee RII 97 Key the Removable Terminal Block Gore Gaia p ERN Bice 99 Connect the Wiring 5 5 ioe eee ee URN hs SOE eae ats 100 RTB Types each RTB comes with housing 101 RTB Wiring Recommendations 0 000 e cee ee eee 103 Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing 104 Choose the Extended depth Housing 0000048 105 Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended depth Housing 106 Install the Removable Terminal Block 0 00000 002 ee 107 7 Table of Contents Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Module specific Information Remove the Removable Terminal Block 0 0 000000005 108 Remove the Module from the Chassis 0 000 cee eens 109 Chapter 6 Tntrod ctiOB zv ddr on eck ERE ac DURER REA devis 111 Configuration Process Overview lleeeeeeeesn 112 Create a New Module 0 0000 ccc cette 114 Communication Format 2 0 0 0 0c eens 117 Electronic Keying qaaa foe ERAISEPIANWGXREEXRP FERE dONIS 119 Custom Settings Modify Default Configuration 120 Gonneciomn Labu sian eas erbe NR eibi naa 121 Confiurauon Eb such
14. 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the Output is shorted to L2 output as Off output as Off 2 Fuse Blown bit is set 2 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the No Load or output is shorted to L1 output as On output as Off 2 Pulse Test fails 2 No Load bit is off 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the L1 or L2 are disconnected or outside the output as Off output as Off 47 63 Hz frequency range 2 No Load shows a fault 2 No Load bit is set 3 Field Power Loss shows a fault 3 Field Power Loss is set 4 Pulse Test fails 4 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the 1 Data Echo returns the state of the output Hardware point damage output as On 2 as Off 2 Output Verify bit is set ESEESE 2 3 4 5 76 The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage When pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off It is no is reset possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state If a short circuit occurs the output point is turned Off and the fa
15. 1K EE 74HCT14 WV d Im b D gt 560 1 5K Low to True Format 1756 1G16 0 2 0 8V Input guaranteed to be in on state 0 8 2 0V Input state not guaranteed e 2 0 5 5V Input guaranteed to be in off state Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 161 Chapter 7 Module specific Information DCINPUT 8 ST012345670 ST 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15K 162 Technical Specifications 1756 1G16 Attribute 1756 1G16 Inputs 16 8 points group Voltage category 5V DC TTL source Low True Operating voltage range 4 5 5 5V DC 50 mV P P ripple max Input delay time OFF to ON 5 to 0V DC transition ON to OFF 0 to 5V DC transition Hardware delay 270 us nom 450 us max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms Hardware delay 390 us nom 700 us max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 110 mA Current draw Q 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 1 4 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 4 8 BTU hr 60 C 140 F Off state voltage max 2N Off state current max 4 1 mA nput impedance max 1 4 kQ min 1 5 kQtypical nput current nom 3 7 mA Q 5V DC nput current max 4 1 mA Q 5V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms solation voltage 250V continuous basic insulati
16. Type CIP Generic Message Control Latche reset H DN CER End l P OUP Mamruutine 7 4 Click the box in each rung to see the associated configuration and communication Rungs 0 and 1 are used to perform a reset fuse service on Bits 0 and 1 respectively The example is of a 1756 OA8D module in slot 4 Rung 2 performs a pulse test service to slot 4 Rung 3 moves the results of the pulse test to a data storage location The actual results appear in the message instruction tags under the tag name EXERR Rung 4 performs a reset latched diagnostics service to slot 4 This example shows an output module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 213 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The Controller Tags dialog box shows examples of the tags created in the ladder logic as displayed in the tag editor Controller Tags Pulse Fuse example controller Scope Puse Fuse exampi e Show Show Al Sort Tag Nave pfi ais eem ue B08 rein a pseitueee MESSAGE i EH Slot4 B fuse reset MESSAGE reset ld bl DINT Binary reset sl b DINT Decimal Pulse_test_slot4_b0 MESSAGE pulse sl b DINT 5 Binary sj E pulse resulls sd DINT Decimal E EE Pluse Results Slo DINT 1 Binary locati AB 1756 DI DC piocatat AB 1756
17. GND GND2 D 18 171 N 8 L j GND 2 D 20 14 N 9 Group 2 z Grou p GND 2 HO 22 2 IN 10 14 3 KQ 1 4 W p Marias Open Wire GND 2 24 23 0 N 11 2 Resistor GND 3 26 2359 N 12 GND 3 28 z279 N 13 Group 3 GND 3 30 29D N 14 Group GND 3 D 32 31D N 15 GND 3 D 34 331g Not Used Not Used 36 Not Used Diagnostics 1756 IB16D Attribute 1756 IB16D Open wire Off state leakage current 1 2 mA min Timestamp of diagnostics 1ms Technical Specifications 1756 IB16D SN amp DCINPUT Attribute 1756 IB16D TOINEN 3 Inputs 16 diagnostic 4 points group FT 012345670 Voltage category 12 24V DC sink K SI AOE BS Operating voltage range 10 30V DC FLT 8 9 10111213 1415 Input voltage nom 24V DC DIAGNOSTIC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 340 us nom 1 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 740 us nom 4 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 150 mA Current draw 24V 3 mA Power dissipation max 5 8 W 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 19 78 BTU hr Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 149 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 IB16D Attribute 1756 IB16D Off state voltage max 5V Off state current max 1 5 mA O
18. gt AC OUTPUT Attribute 1756 0N8 3 Outputs 8 4 points group ST01234567 i E Voltage category 24V AC 6 Operating voltage range 10 30V AC current gt 50 mA 47 63 Hz 16 30V AC current lt 50 mA 47 63 Hz Output delay time OFF to ON 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 11 ms Q 50 Hz ON to OFF 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 11 ms Q 50 Hz Current draw 5 1V 200 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 5 1 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 17 39 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 3 mA per point On state voltage drop max 1 5V peak 2 A 6V peak lt 50 mA Current per point max 2 A 60 C 140 F Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 227 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 0N8 Attribute 1756 0N8 Current per module max 5 A Q 30 C 86 F linear derating 4A Q 60 C 140 F linear derating Surge current per point aa 43 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C Load current min 10 mA per point Commutating voltage 4V us for loads 50 mA 0 2V us for loads lt 50 mA Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insula
19. Temperature surrou nding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storag IEC 60068 2 2 Test IEC 60068 2 14 Tes e IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Tes Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing Vibration 180 IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0A8 Attribute 1756 0A8 Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions SPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 C 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m wi 10V m wi 10V m wi th 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz th 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz th 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IE
20. Multiple controllers own the same digital input module A change is required in the module s configuration however the change must be made to the program in all controllers In this case you can a Inhibit the module b Change configuration in all controllers c Uninhibit the module You want to Flash upgrade a digital I O module We recommend you a Inhibit the module b Perform the upgrade c Uninhibit the module You are using a program that includes a module that you do not physically possess yet but you do not want the controller to continually look for a module that does not exist yet In this case you can inhibit the module in your program until it physically resides in the proper slot Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 51 Chapter 3 52 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs Controllers generate a 64 bit coordinated system time CST for their respective chassis The CST is a chassis specific time that is not synchronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over the ControlNet network to establish a network update time NUT as described in Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software in Chapter 2 You can configure your digital input modules to access the CST and timestamp input data with a relative time reference that is the value of the CST of when that input data changes state IMPORTANT Becaus
21. 2 On Fault Input data Fault Status An an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted 1 bit per point Diagnostic Input Module C onfiguration Tags and input data for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module will be faulted 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault Name Configuration or I 0 Data Definition COSOnOffEn Configuration Change of State On to Off Triggers an event in the controller for On to Off 1bit per point transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 Disable 1 Enable COS OffOnEn Configuration Change of State Off to On Triggers an event in the controller for Off to On 1 bit per point 250 transition of input point and causes the input module to update the data table as soon as possible The CST timestamp is also updated 0 Disable 1 Enable Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Diagnostic Input Module Configuration Tags DiagCOSDisable 1 bit per point Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Tag Definitions Appendix B Definition Diagnostic Change of State Triggers the module to transmit diagnostic status data with an updated timestamp as soon as the diag
22. 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 183 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 0A8D Attribute Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 0A8D 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 k
23. Attrib ute Temperature operatin IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 OB8EI 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges 198 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 OB8EI Attribute Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 1756 OB8EI 3V m with 1 kHz sine w 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz ave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports
24. See page 117 for a description of the communication format choices IMPORTANT Make sure you choose the correct communication format for your application because you cannot change the selection after the program is downloaded with the controller You will have to reconfigure the module to change the communication format 9 Choose an electronic keying method See page 44 for details 10 Do one of the following to either accept default configuration settings or edit configuration data a To accept the default configuration settings make sure Open Module Properties is not checked and then click OK b To set up a custom configuration make sure Open Module Properties is checked and then click OK The New Module Properties dialog box appears with tabs for entry of additional configuration settings 116 Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Chapter 6 Communication Format The communication format determines what type of configuration options are made available what type of data is transferred between the module and its owner controller what tags are generated when the configuration is complete Once a module is created you cannot change the communication format unless you delete and recreate the module The communication format also defines the connection between the controller writing the configuration
25. Sot ma i jPTgName dics For Base Tag Type Sy Description B m Hon eoor Deci i DINTI2Decin L HeastTimestamp 0 MM DINT Decim C e O oen Jees o 1 e Socii AB 175 m Plot lal T abis L Eloa jg AM L Elato ap FIT Tine_at which Input Changed 0 Loca CSTTimestamp O Local C DINT Decm mW Time at which Input Changed 1 Loca O1 CST Timestamplt Locat H C DINT Decim m Time a which Output Wil Change Local 1 0 CSTTimestamp Local1 0 DINT Decin Br s DT Monitor Tags tat Tags Yj 1 1p 272 Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Reset a Fuse Perform Pulse Test and Reset Latched Diagnostics The following ladder logic program shows how to use ladder logic to reset the electronic fuse of a faulted point perform a pulse test and to reset latched diaganostics MainProgiam Mainfioutine x AEM E Local Fusedlown t J H Tyoe CIP Genetic T Message Contiol Slotd_BO_fure_reset E DNs AR Loca 8l Dala 1 Lacal4l FuseBlown T Type CIP Genetic Ht Message Contiol Slot4_B1_fuse_reset i bsc DN es HER KH Loca 81 Dala 2 J Type CIP Generic CEN Message Conital Pulse est slctd HD EJ OUS HER Sources Pulse_test_sl iia bOEXERA 0 Des Pluse feus Slot4 0 HOOD 0000_0000_0000_0000_0D00_Q000_O000 Loca 8l Dala 3 nsa
26. Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1756 IB16l 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Oscillatory surge withstand IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 IB 161 3kV Certification 1756 IB16l UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements e EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV 1 154 TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 When marked See the
27. o u4 GND i d 25 ep ML INS L2 6 gy 1 6 L2 7 ale 151g Si ControlLogix Display Jimper Bat 5 le Backplane Cut to Length Ell E j Interface E L2 9 20 19 N 9 xe 240 D 22 21 D N10 o 1 L2 11 ED 24 23 d 11 Nonisolated d Wiring 1212 Lig aga el is 2 L2 13 Qiz 27 G H3 O Additional jumper bars may be purchased 244 30 29 P by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 2 5 HE ae ae L2 Qo L2 15 34 33 Not Used Not used CD se ss d Not Used u EA Ds Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 IA161 Attribute 1756 IA161 3 Inputs 16 individually isolated Voltage category 120V AC 6 Operating voltage range 79 132V AC 47 63 Hz Input voltage nom 120V AC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 10 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 8 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 125 mA Current draw Q 24V 3mA Power dissipation max 4 9 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 16 71 BTU hr Off state voltage max 20V Off state current max 25mA On state current min 5 mA Q 79V AC 47 63 Hz On state current max 15 mA Q 132V AC 47 63 Hz Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 IA16I Attribute Inrush curre
28. 6 By Group 0 1 INO Daisy N3 IG nz me c 1 ifa care wsl FED me mee i RTB 7 N 7 H IN 6 GND i ie ControlLogix Display En Ie e Backplane Ng T Interface QD q CER KI G3 ED D ED 3 EG paga Technical Specifications 1756 1A16 ACINPUT 3 Attribute 1756 1A16 38101234567 o Inputs 16 8 points group RT01234567 K Voltage category 120V AC 8 Operating voltage range 74 132V AC 47 63 Hz DIAGNOSTIC Input voltage nom 120V AC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 10 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 8 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 105 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 5 8 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 18 41 BTU hr Off state voltage max 20V Off state current max 2 5 mA On state current min 5 mA 74V AC On state current max 13 mA 132V AC Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 137 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 1A16 Attribute Inrush current max 1756 1A16 250 mA peak decaying to lt 37 in 22 ms without activation Input impedance max 10 15 kQ 132V AC 60 Hz Cycl
29. 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 IA8D Certification 1756 IA8D UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 136 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 IA16 ControlLogix AC 74 132V input module 1756 IA16 Simplified Schematic i TE 7 N 1 IEB INO
30. August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Chapter 6 Edit Configuration Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 After you have set configuration for a module you can review and change your choices in the RSLogix 5000 programming softwate You can download the data to the controller while online This is called dynamic reconfiguration Follow these steps to edit a module s configuration 1 On the Controller Organizer right click an I O module and choose Properties EJ Controller Logix5563 1 Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler E Power Up Handler B S Tasks E58 Maintask E MainProgram Unscheduled Programs Phases B Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes Gi Add On Instructions B Data Types Cg User Defined Gg Strings Gj Add On Defined E OR Predefined c Ey Module Defined Trends 1 0 Configuration E 1756 Backplane 1756 A10 fa 0 1756 L63 Logix5563 8 cut Ctlex Ba Copy Ctrl C E Paste Ctrlev Delete Del Cross Reference Ctri E Alt Epter The Module Properties dialog box appears E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Type 1756 IB16D 16 Point 10 30 DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name B160 Slot Description zi Comm Format Full Diagnostics Input Data Revision pa fi E Electronic Keying Compatible Keying
31. Cable Overview As an alternative to buying RTBs and connecting the wites yourself you can buy a wiring system that connects to I O modules through pre wired and pre tested cables The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency The combinations include the following Interface modules IFMs mount on DIN rails to provide the output terminal blocks for the I O module Use the IFMs with the pre wired cables that match the I O module to the interface module For a complete list of the IFMs available for use with ControlLogix digital I O modules see the table on page 289 1 0 Module Pre wired Cable IFM Pre wired cables are individually color coded conductors that connect to a standard terminal block The other end of the cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I O module All of the pre wired cables use 0 326 mm 22 AWG wire For a complete list of the pre wired cables available for use with ControlLogix digital I O modules see the table on page 302 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 287 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Additional pre wired cable combinations include the following e Digital I O module ready c
32. European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T3 X FM 1 148 FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 IB16D ControlLogix DC 10 30V diagnostic input module Simplified Schematic 1756 IB16D Input ControlLogix Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Mui em IN 0 l 5V Backplane apo oe El no TET Interface Display GNDO AE 4 3o ina c M Group 0 GNDO eje sid N2 143kQ 1 4 w Group Ae g bv GND 0 ais 7 g N 3 2 Resistor i i erm GND Eio 9 ED INA rf GND 1 E2 nie INS s Group 1 Z A Group GND 0 L t d d E GND 6 14 13d N 6 o ld T N GND 1 TED 16 15D IN 7 n
33. Help 1 Choose from the options in the Connection tab Description Enter an RPI value or use the default Inhibit Module Check the box to prevent communication between the owner controller and the module This option allows for maintenance of the module without faults being reported to the controller Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Check the box to create a major fault if there is a connection failure with the module while in Run mode For important information on this checkbox see Configure a Major Fault to Occur in the Logix5000 Controllers Information and Status Programming Manual publication 1756 PM015 Module Fault 2 Click OK The fault box is empty if you are offline The type of fault appears in the text box if a fault occurs when the module is online 57 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Enable Change of State The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you determine whether a change of state occurs when a field device becomes Off to On or On to Off 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 1A16 3 1 8 15 1ms v 8ms v Iv v v ne r r QQ ITTRI Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following Click a box to enable COS for a specific point for either Off to On or On to O
34. IMPORTANT Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch service Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the 1 0 module s power is cycled The Point column on the left side of the Configuration tab lets you set diagnostic latching to occur for a specific point where the field device is wired to the I O module 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Enable Change of State Enable Diagnostics for Enable i Input Fitter Time Diag FF Openwre Dio Off gt On On Off ie 8 15 1ms v t1ms xi FAAI v Iv Iv v v Iv Iv Iv Iv XI XI SI XI XI XIXI XII NISI SII SI SII SII i v Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following Click a box to enable diagnostic latching for a specific point Clear the check mark to disable diagnostic latching for a specific point 3 Click OK Diagnostic Timestamp Diagnostic I O modules can timestamp the time when a fault occurs or when it clears This feature provides greater accuracy and flexibility in running applications Modules use the ControlLogix system clock fro
35. Module Configuration 175618160 16 Point 10V 30V DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Sues ene Product Type Digital Input o o LI os Module Full Diagnostics Input Data Catalog Number 1756 IB16D CINES oon EENE Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 1 F7 Open ace Proven an HS Communication is prevented Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 Communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data Compatible Keying Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to accept or reject communication Different module families communication adapters and module types implement the compatibility check differently based on the family capabilities and on prior knowledge of compatible products Compatible Keying is the default setting Compatible Keying allows the physical module to accept the key of the module configured in the software provided that the configured module is one the physical module is capable of emulating The exact level of emulation required is product and revision specific 46 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 With Compatible Keying you
36. RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software in Chapter 2 See page 52 for a table that describes how to you the system clock Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules remember the following conditions that may occur depending on the module s Major Revision If the module has a Major Revision 1 it will always return a positive timestamping value If the module has a Major Revision gt 2 it will return a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first Change of State condition occurs Look at the Module Properties dialog box of RSLogix 5000 software to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the controller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Producer Consumer Model By using the Producer Consumer model ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without having been polled by a controller first The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example a diagnostic input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same
37. 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 210 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B161 Attribute EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 1756 0B161 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 OB16l Certification 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 1756 0B16l UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equi
38. EIER Slot4 DA8D C Connected E amp 1 0 Configuration S S 1756 Backplane 1756 410 fl 1 1756 HSC B HSC_Module fi 4 1756 0A8D Slot4_0A8D Enable OE fa 8 1756 L63 L63_New_Controller Error Co Error Path Error Text Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 269 Appendix C 210 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs This section demonstrates the use of timestamped inputs and scheduled outputs for digital I O The change of state CST can be used to synchronize the output turning Off to On based upon the time that the input transitioned Off to On The program can be extended to include synchronizing multiple output modules by sending the same timestamp to all output modules For our example the output will follow the state of the input 0 but it will be delayed by exactly 10 ms The advantage of using CST over timers is that the synchronization is being performed at the I O module which eliminates any jitter due to controller or communication delays Your control becomes much mote deterministic even under changing loads For this synchronization to work properly the 10 ms delay must be long enough to account for any controller backplane and network delays The input and output modules must reside in the same rack as a Time Master that is controller Timestamp units are microseconds In the following illustratio
39. Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0B16D Certification 1756 0B16D 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See C SA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Cla European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant wi EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Cla Requirements use 8 Zone A amp B h use 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act complian AS
40. Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 1 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 0V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 147 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 IB16 Attribute EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 1756 IB16 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Oscillatory surge withstand IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 IB16 Certification 3kV 1756 IB16 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B
41. IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 14 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 1H161 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature s rrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Tempe rature storage 068 2 14 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g Q 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 165 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 IH16l Attribute 1756 IH161 Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line l
42. Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 IM16l Attribute ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 1756 IM1 8 kV air di 6 kV contact discharges scharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM Q 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 5 Hz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 IM161 Certification 1756 IM1 6l 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radio
43. OUT 0 OUT 1 le 7 s OUT 1 k 2 Ll Lo pez io og OUT 2 ControlLogix Backplane Interface La OUT2 li nk our2 7 Display DC 3 CD 14 13 0D OUT 3 Non Isolated OUT 3 16 15 Our Surge Current Chart Wiring DC 4 18 17 QUTA i T OUT 4 A 20 19 OUT 4 T Surge C Ez aE ours Daisy 9 OUT 5 5 24 23 OUT 5 cae e Dek 26 zs ED ours e other o Continuous 60 C 1409F mr OUT6 Diz 27 CD OUT6 l 3 2A mo amp DOH GQ 30 29 OUT 7 Ny e o eed OUT 7 32 n8 OUT 7 Td ot used 34 a3 ot used chainto ot used CD ae 354 ot used other 0 Time 10 ms RTBs TN pccom Technical Specifications 1756 OH8l Q gt DCOUTPUT Attribute 1756 OHBI 3 Outputs 8 individually isolated seh TM Voltage category 120V DC sink source K 8 Operating voltage range 90 146V DC Output delay time OFF to ON 2 ms max ON to OFF 2 ms max Current draw 5 1V 210 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 3 3 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 11 25 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 1 mA per poin On state voltage drop max 2VDC 2A Current per point max 2A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 8A 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 4 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 1 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 2 mA per poin 224 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Technical Specifications 1756 0H8l Attribut
44. compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 196 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 OB8EI ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused isolated output module 1756 OBSEI Simplified Schematic 5V E DC 0 4 LL L mot j a feb ouro 5
45. marking diagnostic data changes 75 mechanical keying 16 minor revision 113 module 1756 IA8D 134 1756 IA16 137 1756 IA161 140 1756 IA32 143 1756 IB16 146 1756 IB16D 149 1756 IB16l 152 1756 IB32 155 1756 016 158 1756 1616 161 1756 IH16l 164 1756 IM161 167 1756 IN16 170 1756 IV16 173 1756 IV32 176 1756 0A8 179 1756 0A8D 182 1756 OA8E 185 1756 0A16 188 1756 0A161 191 1756 0B8 194 1756 0B8EI 197 1756 0B8l 200 1756 0B16D 203 1756 0B16E 206 1756 0B161 209 1756 0B1618 212 1756 0B32 215 1756 0C8 218 1756 0616 221 1756 0H8l 224 1756 ON8 227 1756 OV16E 230 1756 OV32E 233 1756 0W161 236 1756 OX8l 239 module compatibility diagnostic input modules 69 output modules 70 nondiagnostic input modules 40 output modules 41 module fault word diagnostic input modules 94 output modules 96 standard output modules 68 module identification information 17 ASCII text string 17 major revision 17 minor revision 17 product code 17 product type 17 retrieving 43 serial number 17 status 17 vendor ID 17 WHO service 17 module status retrieving 17 module tags accessing in RSLogix 5000 software 129 multiple owners input modules 35 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 NEMA clamp RTB 102 no load detection diagnostic output modules 86 word diagnostic output modules 96 0 online services input modules 129 output modules 129 open wire detection 80 word diagnostic input modules 94 output da
46. the module processes messaging services only after the needs of the I O connection have been met For example you may want to unlatch all process alarms on the module but real time control of your process is still occurring by using the input value from that same channel Because the input value is critical to your application the module prioritizes the sampling of inputs ahead of the unlatch service request 259 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Create a New Tag 260 This prioritization allows input channels to be sampled at the same frequency and the process alarms to be unlatched in the time between sampling and producing the real time input data One Service Performed Per Instruction Message instructions will only cause a module setvice to be performed once per execution For example if a message instruction sends a service to the module to unlatch the high high alatm on a particular channel that channel s high high alarm will unlatch but may be set on a subsequent channel sample The message instruction must then be re executed to unlatch the alarm a second time This section shows how to create a tag in ladder logic when adding a message instruction Ladder logic is written in the Main Routine section of the RSLogix 5000 software program Follow these steps to create a tag 1 Start the RSLogix 5000 software program and open an existing I O ptoject or create a new o
47. 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 265V AC 47 265V AC 47 253V AC 47 242V AC 47 63 Hz 30 C 86 F a None open style channels on 63 Hz 40 C 104 F 8 points on 63 Hz 45 C 113 F all channels on 63 Hz 60 C 140 F all channels on 1756 IM161 0 60 C 32 140 F Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60 Relative humidity 068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60 Vibrati on 068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60 Shock operating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g IEC 60 Shock nonoperating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissi 168 ons CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010
48. 1 Enable 249 Appendix B Tag Definitions Standard Input Module Configuration Tags COS OffOnEn 1 bit per point Configuration or 1 0 Data Configuration Definition Change of State Off to On Causes updated data to be sent to the Controller immediately after an input for an Off to On transition of the masked input points The CST timestamp also is updated May be used to trigger an Event Task in the Controller 0 Disable 1 Enable FilterOnOff 0 7 1 byte per group Configuration Filter Times On to Off Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition Operates on groups of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms FilterOffOn 0 7 1 byte per group Configuration Standard Input Data Tags Filter Times Off to On Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition Operates on groups of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms Name Configuration or I O Data Definition CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to 8 bytes indicate the time that data changed see COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn Field PwrLossEn Data Input data Off On Status for each input point 1 bit per point 0 Off
49. 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC 1492 CABLEXW x cable length status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM20F FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0616 N A 1756 0H8l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFMAOF FS 120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 ON8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC 1492 CABLEXW x cable length status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM20F FS2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for output 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0V16E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D24 1492 IFM20D24 2 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Fusible 120V A
50. 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper insulation max wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in Wire category 12 North American temperature code T3C IEC temperature code T3 Enclosure type None open style 1 2 aximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level insta Environmental Specifications 1756 IB16 Attribute Temperature operating lation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1756 IB16 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11
51. 290 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 IB32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFMAOF 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM40D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators for inputs 1756 1016 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX xecable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1756 1616 N A 1756 IH16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS120A 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators with four terminals per input 1756 IM16l 1492 IFM40DS240A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 240V AC status 1492 CABLExY x cable length indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS240A 4 Fusible Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1756 IN16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM
52. 30 C 86 F 4 A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 4 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 2 s Load current min mA per poin 209 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 0B16l Attribute Isolation voltage 1756 0B161 outputs to backplane output to output 250V continuous basic insulation type 125V continuous basic insulation type Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper insulation max wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B161 Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1756 0B16l 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage
53. 4 Inside the message box in the Message Control field right click the question mark to access a pull down menu SG Message Messane Control d Cut Instruction Ctrl X Copy Instruction Ctrl C Fa Paste Ckri V Delete Instruction Del fidd adder Flamant A lF LTme 5 Choose New Tag Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 261 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The New Tag dialog box appears with the cursor in the Name field IMPORTANT We suggest you name the tag to indicate what module service the message instruction is sending For example if a message instruction is to reset an electronic fuse then name the tag reset fuse to reflect this xi Name Stet C Reset Fusd Description p Cancel Help Usage normal ad Type Alias For Data Type MESSAGE UA Scope fa L53 New Controller Eitemal Riead wWirite Style T Constant Open MESSAGE Configuration 6 Choose from the options in the New Tag dialog box Field Name Description Name Type the tag name including the slot number in the module Description Type an option tag description Usage Use the default Type Use the default Alias for Leave blank Data Type Choose MESSAGE Scope Choose the Controller scope Note Message tags can be created only with the Controller scope External Access Use the default 262
54. 48V DC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 1 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 4 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 100 mA Current draw 24V 3 mA Power dissipation max 5 2 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 17 73 BTU hr Off state voltage max 10V Off state current max 1 5 MA On state current min 2 mA 30V DC 158 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 IC16 Attribute 1756 1C16 On state current max 7 mA Q 60V DC Inrush current max 250 mA Input impedance max 8 57 kQ 60V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane 125V continuous basic insulation type input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s inputs to backplane Routine tested 924V AC for 2 s input group to group Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4 IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size req
55. A for 20 ms Q 24V DC output on then short 5 A for 20 ms Q 24V DC output into short Time stamp of diagnostics 1 ms Technical Specifications 1756 0V32E Q DC OUTPUT Attribute 1756 OV32E pro1234567 r 3 Outputs 32 electronically fused 16 points group 111111 pT 89012345 O Voltage category 12 24N DC sink 331 312 222 K Pl 67890123 8 Operating voltage range 10 30V DC j22222233 i 45678901 1 Output delay time 24V to OV DC transition OFF to ON 75 us nom 300 us max ELECTRONIC FUSING ON to OFF 230 us nom 1 ms max Current draw 5 1V 390 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 5 88 W 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 20 1 BTU hr Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 233 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 0V32E Attribute Off state leakage current per point max 1756 0V32E 1 mA per point On state voltage drop max 350 mV DC 0 5 A Current per point max 0 5 A Q 50 C 122 F linear derating 0 35 A 60 C 140 F Current per module max 16 A 50 C 122 F linear derating 10 A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 2 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 2 mA per output Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2
56. ControlLogix Analog I O Modules User Manual publication 1756 UM009 1756 CNB 1756 CNBR ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems publication CNET UMOO1 1756 DNB DeviceNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication DNET UM004 1756 DHRIO ControlLogix Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface Module User Manual publication 1756 UM514 1756 DHRIOXT ControlLogix XT Data Highway Plus Remote 1 0 Communication Interface Module Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN638 1756 ENBT 1769 ENET EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UMOO 1756 Lx ControlLogix Selection Guide publication 1756 SG001 11 Preface Related Documentation 1756 Lx ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 1756 Lx 1769 Lx 1789 Lx Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures PowerFlex 700S Programming Manual publication 1756 PM001 1756 Lx 1769 Lx 1789 Lx Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions PowerFlex 700S Reference Manual publication 1756 RM003 If you need more information on these products contact your local Rockwell Automation distributor or sales office The documentation listed in the Related Documentation table is available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter 1 Introduction Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August
57. DI DC m F Local 8 1 B 1756 DI Time IT Local 8 C AB 1756_D1 C 0 FlLocat 7 0 AB1756_00 0 0 Monitor Tags A Edit Tags 274 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status This ladder logic example shows how to retrieve module identification and status through a WHO setvice In this application a message instruction retrieves the following module identification information Product type Product code Major revision Minor revision Status Vendor Setial numbet String length e ASCII string A full explanation of each module identification category is provided after the ladder logic application TTTISTUEE The ladder logic example in this section Uses a user defined WHO data structure and a series of Copy instructions following the Message instruction in the screen capture to make the module identification information more easily understood The user defined WHO data structure displays module identification information in an easily understood format For example the Controller Tags dialog box shows the module s major revision is 2 Controller Tags who controller Scope Jwhc
58. Description This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules Module fault word 66 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only 16 bits bits 0 15 are used in the module fault word Condition Set Bits Communications fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix standard digital input modules Bit 0 Module fault Word All Modules Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controllers Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 42676 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word ControlLogix digital output modules multicast fault and status data to any owner listening controllers All output modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional wotds to indicate fault conditions The table lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has o
59. Diag Latching Y Iv e Iv Iv Vv Vv 7 Vv v Iv NISI SI SI SI XI XII EREREREREREREE SISISISI SI XE ISI D r 5 Li 6 ott r 7 ott mj Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the No Load column Click the box to enable the feature for a specific point Clear the check mark to disable the feature for a specific point 3 Click OK This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see Appendix B Field side Output Verification Field side output verification informs you that logic side instructions that the module consumes are accurately represented on the power side of a switching device In other words for each output point this feature confirms that the output is On when it is commanded to be On The diagnostic output module can tell a controller that it received a command and whether the field side device connected to the module has executed the command For example in applications that need to verify that the module has accurately followed the processor s instructions the module samples the field side state and compares it to the system side state This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a
60. FUSED 1756 OB8l 1756 OB8l 1756 0C8 1756 0H8l N amp DC OUTPUT 3 1012 345 67 0 K Troubleshoot Your Module 1756 0A161 The status indicators shown are used on output modules 1756 0A8 1756 0N8 AC OUTPUT ST012 34567 0 ST 8 910 111213 1415 K L 1756 0A8E 4 AC OUTPUT 8 3101234567 Q K AC OUTPUT T 01234567 0 FUSE 01 2 3456 7 gH ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 0B16D 1756 0B161 1756 OB161S 1756 0616 DC OUTPUT 3 801234567 ATO12 34567 K ST 89 10 11 12 1314 15 FLT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 8 DIAGNOSTIC amp DC OUTPUT 3101234567 ST 8 910 111213 1415 KIC 1756 0B32 1756 0V32E 1756 OB8EI DC OUTPUT 3 ST 01234567 FUSE 01 2 3456 7 K 0 ELECTRONICALLY FUSED 1756 0X8l DC OUTPUT 3 3 1 1 1 KO 6 9 2 7 1756 0W16l amp RELAY OUTPUT 8 6 8101234567 0 K ST 8 910 111213 1415 SSS amp RELAY OUTPUT 3 3101234567 0 K 40464 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Troubleshoot Your Module Appendix A Use RS
61. GND Daisy Chain IN 9 ae N 8 to Other RTBs IN 11 Eln 11 N 10 ControlLogix Display N 13 Fe 14 136 N 12 Backplane IN 15 AY 16 158 N 1 Interface 12 0 t5 18 17 L2 0 IN 17 20 19 N 16 4 IN 19 amp 22 21E N 18 ee E 24 23 E IN 21 N 20 Group 1 IN 23 26 25 N 22 IN 25 28 27 N 24 IN 27 a 30 29 a N 26 L1 IN 29 p 2 31 N 28 IN 31 CD 34 33 N 30 D 36 ss CD L2 1 Technical Specifications 1756 1A32 Ba AC INPUT Attribute 1756 1A32 58101234567 3 Inputs 32 diagnostic 4 points group sag IIIi o 012345 Voltage category 120V AC st 11112222 67890123 6 Operating voltage range 74 132V AC 22222233 47 63 Hz 5145678901 Input voltage nom 120V AC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 1 5 ms nom 10 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 1 ms nom 8 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 165 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 6 1 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 20 8 BTU hr Off state voltage max 20V Off state current max 2 5mA On state current min 5 mA Q 74V AC On state current max 15 mA Q 132V AC Inrush current max 390 mA Input impedance max 14 0 kQ 132V AC 60 Hz Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 143 Chapter 7 Module specific Information
62. I O modules for a given controller by using RSLogix 5000 programming software and download that information to the controller 2 If the I O configuration data references a scheduled connection to a module in a remote chassis connected via the ControlNet network run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software to schedule the network Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 3 After running RSNetWotx software perform an online save of the RSLogix 5000 project so the configuration information that RSNetWorx software sends to the controller is saved IMPORTANT You must run RSNetWorx for ControlNet software whenever a new I O module is added to a scheduled ControlNet chassis When a module is permanently removed from a remote chassis we recommend that you run RSNetWorx for ControllVet software to reschedule the network and optimize the allocation of network bandwidth Internal Module Operations ControlLogix I O modules experience signal propagation delays that must be accounted for duting operation Some of these delays are user selectable and some are inherent to the module hardware For example there 1s a small delay typically less than 1 ms between when a signal is applied at the RTB of a ControlLogix input module and when a signal is sent to the system over the backplane this typical time reflects a filter time of 0 ms for a DC input This section offers an explanatio
63. Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 0A8E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM20F FS 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators Isolated with four terminals per output and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 CABLExV x cable length 293 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable y 179560416 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D120N Status indicating Narrow standard with 120V l AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120 2 120V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 Fusible Extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F120 2 Extra terminals with 120V AC i blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492
64. Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable o SIL2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 241 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Notes 242 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Appendix A Introduction Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Troubleshoot Your Module This appendix describes the status indicators on the ControlLogix digital modules and how to use them to troubleshoot the module Each I O module has status indicators located on the front of the module These indicators show the I O state yellow fault or fuse status red A bi colored status indicates a module status with an OK red green Status Indicators for Input Modules Indicator Status Description OK Green light The inputs are being multicast and in normal operating state OK Flashing green The module
65. Lil1110 012345 Voltage category 12 24V DC source sp 11112222 Of eee e Operating voltage range 10 31 2V DC 22222233 45678901 Output delay time OFF to ON 60 us nom 1 ms max ON to OFF 200 us nom 1 ms max Current draw 5 1V 300 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 4 8 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 16 37 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max 0 5 mA per point On state voltage drop max 200 mV DC Q 0 5 A Current per point max 0 5 A Q 50 C 122 F linear derating 0 35 A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 16 A Q 50 C 122 F linear derating 10 A 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 1 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 3 mA per point Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 215 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 0B32 Attribute Isolation voltage 1756 0B32 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper insulation max wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in Wire category 18 North American temperature code T3C IEC temperature code T3 Enclosure type 1 Maximum wire size requ
66. Module 3 To key the RTB in positions that correspond to unkeyed module positions insert the straight wedge shaped tab on the RTB with the rounded edge first X gt Module side of RTB 67 20851 M 4 Push the tab onto the RTB until it stops 5 Repeat step 1 step 4 by using additional U shaped and straight tabs until the module and RTB lock into each other properly Connect the Wiring You can use an RTB or a Bulletin 1492 pre wired Interface Module IFM to connect wiring to your module If you are using an RTB follow the directions below to connect wires to the RTB An IFM has been pre wited before you received it To see a listing of the IFMs available for use with the ControlLogix analog I O modules see Appendix G This chapter explains the general guidelines for wiring your digital I O modules including grounding the cable and connecting the wires to each RTB type f The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency 100 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 The following table shows each module catalog number and the Install the ControlLogix I O Module corresponding page with the wiring diagram Chapter 5
67. Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 IB32 Attribute EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 1756 IB32 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Oscillatory surge withstand IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 IB32 3kV Certification 1756 1B32 c UL us UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 UL Listed for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations certified for U S and Canada See UL File E194810 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079
68. Not owned outputs in Program mode 4 Unused 5 Internal fault need flash update 6 Run mode 7 Program mode output mods only Bit 8 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 9 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 10 0 No fault 1 Minor recoverable fault Bit 11 0 No fault 1 Major unrecoverable fault Bits 15 12 Unused 4 Vendor ID Module manufacturer vendor 1 Allen Bradley Serial Number Module serial number 5 Length of ASCII Text Number of characters in module s text string String ASCII Text String Module s ASCII text string description Review of Tags in Ladder Logic When you use tags in ladder logic applications remember these guidelines Ladder logic tags represent the module on a point per bit basis For example point 0 bit 0 on the module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 If you are performing a service through the tags a value of 0 prevents the action from occurring and a value of 1 causes the action to occur For example if you want to reset the electronic fuse on a particular bit enter 1 in the tags If you are checking the response of a service through the tags a value of 0 means the bit passed the service and a value of 1 means the bit failed the service For example if you perform a pulse test and the response displays a 0 for a particular bit the bit passed the test 271 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconf
69. On Vv Iv Iv Iv a z F F rc NISI T1 1 TRSIRISI Open Wire a o aa iaa E ERER IERIE j Diagnostics Backplane T1777 TSIRII amp 8 v Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 2 Do the following to enable or disable the COS feature Click the box to enable the input module to send new data to the owner controller at the RPI on input COS if it is enabled and if a diagnostic fault occurs Clear the check mark to disable the feature Real time data is not sent when a diagnostic fault occurs but is still sent at the specified RPI or on input COS if it is enabled 3 Click OK Software Configurable Filter Times On to Off and Off to On filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 software for all ControlLogix input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules Follow these steps to configure the input filter time 1 On the right side of the Configuration tab click the pull down menu to choose the input filter times Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Enable Diagnostics for Enable T Diag V Open Wire Latchin 0 1 2 3 4 5 5
70. Options As with diagnostic input modules ControlLogix diagnostic output modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to group or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use Although some ControlLogix diagnostic I O modules provide non isolated field side wiring options each 1 0 module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Multiple Output Point Densities ControlLogix diagnostic output modules use either 8 or 16 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Electronic Fusing ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Diagnostic digital outputs have internal electronics to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage You can reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 configuration software or by using ladder logic running on a controller For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse see Output Online Services on page 129 Recommended Fuses Circuit Type Cat No Fusing on the Module Recommended Fuse AC 1756 OAgp 2 Yes Fused on a per Electronically fused point basis DC 1756 0B16D 2 9 Yes Fused on a
71. Page Ownership 19 Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software 20 Internal Module Operations 21 Connections 23 Input Module Operation 2 Input Modules in a Local Chassis 27 Trigger Event Tasks 29 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis 29 Output Module Operation 32 Output Modules in a Local Chassis 32 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis 33 Listen only Mode 35 Multiple Owners of Input Modules 35 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners 36 Every I O module in the ControlLogix system must be owned by a RSLogix 5000 controller This owner controller stores configuration data for every module that it owns can be local or remote in regard to the I O module s position sends the I O module configuration data to define the module s behavior and begin operation with the control system Each ControlLogix I O module must continuously maintain communication with its owner controller to operate normally Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software 20 Typically each module in the system will have only one owner Input modules can have more than one owner Output modules however are limited to a single owner For mote information on the increased flexibility provided by multiple owners and the ramifications by using multiple owners see Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners on page 36 The I O configuration portion of the RSLogix 5000
72. Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 IB32 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 1832 IN 0 E 4 ek e o EN C N 3 Dis 3 2 o ale i a 4 GND 0 VK N 5 e 5 N C kj l Group 0 7 Eus 7 a N 6 Group 0 Ei a d N 8 GND emer T oo 7 sud N 11 eun N 10 0 Other RTBs 3 E G 14 13 E ControlLogix Display Nes pa i Backplane N 15 E g Interface ENDO iis Az C1 20 19 19 iz 21 O N 21 G 24 23 Gam N 23 26 25 G a 25 Q 28 27 N 27 D 30 29 N 29 31 N 31 D34 33 GND 1 Q 36 35 75 DCCOM Technical Specifications 1756 1B32 DC INPUT Attribute 1756 1B32 ST 01234567 111111 Inputs 32 16 points group 8189912345 7 11112222 Voltage category 12 24V DC sink 5167890123 22222233 Operating voltage range 10 31 2V DC 5145678901 Input voltage nom 24V DC Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 380 us
73. Saa sa OV aD Loan te iacere bw BE etie eee 39 Input Module Compatibility vea eb ebDEEROR EREMO 40 Output Module Compatibility cacao ev ade v OCEAN 41 Features on ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Modules 42 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 43 Module Fault Reporting cin eoque eua EE rm ede E Ice 43 Software GConHerable c suce te E Pe e need on ud Vat 43 Electronic Keying 454460 Coto es Ra oed eC keene tees 44 Module Inhibiting 4 xad opepy e p tre Ce ER Mna 51 Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs Schedule Outputs 52 Time scheduled Output Control v re 84 2 edes 53 Producer Consumer Model eee 54 Status Indicator Information 444 14 1a eoli i bre e ee gie rarae qe 55 Full Class I Division 2 Compliance us bte rr em ud oy acd 55 UL CSA FM CE C Tick Ex TUV Agency Approvals 55 Features Specific to Standard Input Modules 56 Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State 56 Set RP Iex Bey tag teda e Mesh deat tar iS uet t aa aditum tf ie 56 Enable Change obtu 3ocuxas soe ES te PES ps ey 58 Software Configurable Filter Times 4 erem 59 Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Input Modules 59 Multiple Input Point Densities 5i mh es 59 Features Specific to Standard Output Modules 60 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States issu 60 Output Das Echo Exe ut ar C Ro c9 Ge cas e eee 61 Isolated and Non I
74. Technical Specifications 1756 1A32 Attribute 1756 1A32 Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane 125V continuous basic insulation type input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style U Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 1A32 Attribute 1756 1A32 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Ther
75. Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz EC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports EC 61000 4 4 138 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 1A16 Attribute Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1756 1A16 1kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Oscillatory surge withstand IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 IA16 Certification 3kV 1756 IA16 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE Eu
76. UM058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0A8E ControlLogix AC 74 132V electronically fused output module Simplified Schematic 1756 0A8E x F ControlLogix Opto and Transformer Isolation u piel Iam Im i Backplane VAC o i Interface Y EA 1 0 OUT 0 9t GATE z KD Ie pr SE y OUT Grodp d 1 0 CD ie OUT 1 gt i Le ESTED en Displa Loss of Field Power 7 T im TOS oro 12 11 Surge Current Chart Daisy L1 1 Ves E OUT 4 Chain to 14 13 Other pl J Surge RTBs A CO D outs 20 A 16 15 LE L 2 Group 1 1 1 ie ig OUT 7 Group 1 i m 20 19 L1 1 EB IEB L2 2A E Daisy Chain to Other RTB 0 43 ms TON Time Diagnostics 1756 OA8E Attribute 1756 OA8E Short trip min gt 20 A for 100 ms Field power loss zero cross Detects at 25V peak min firmware phase locked loop Time stamp of diagnostics 1 ms Technical Specifications 1756 OA8E Q AC OUTPUT Attribute 1756 OA8E Outputs 8 electronic fusing 4 points group ST1012345679 FUSEO 12 34 5 6 7K Voltage category 20V AC 6 Operating voltage range
77. Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4 IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B16E Attribute Temperature operating IE IE IE C 60 C 60 C 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 0B16E 0 60 C 32 140 F Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IE IE IE C 60 C 60 C 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g Q 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2
78. and the module itself The number and type of choices varies depending on what module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chassis TIP When you choose a listen only communication format only the General and Connection tabs appear when you view a module s properties in RSLogix 5000 software Controllers that want to listen to a module but not own it use the listen only communication format The table describes the communication formats used with input modules Input Module Communication Formats Data Return Communication Format Module Module returns only general fault Input data and input data Module returns input data with CST timestamped input the value of the system clock data from its local chassis when the input data changes The 1756 CNB module collects all Rack optimization digital input words in the remote 1756 1A16 IA161 chassis and sends them to the IA32 IB161 IB16 controller as a single rack image IB32 IC16 IG16 This connection type limits the IH16l IM161 IN16 status and diagnostic information IV16 IV32 available These choices have the same Listen only input data definition as the similarly named options above except that they are listen only connections Listen only CST timestamped input data Listen only rack optimization 117 Chapter 6 118 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Input Module Commu
79. delay time FF to ON 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 11 ms 50 Hz ON to OFF 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 11 ms 50 Hz Current draw 5 1V 200 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 5 1 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 17 39 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 3 mA per point On state voltage drop max 1 5V peak 2 A 6V peak lt 50 mA Current per point max 2 A 60 C 140 F linear derating Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 179 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 0A8 Attribute Current per module max 1756 0A8 5 A Q 30 C 86 F linear derating 4A Q 60 C 140 F linear derating Surge current per point 20 A for 43 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 10 mA per point Commutating voltage 4V us for loads 50 mA 0 2V us for loads lt 50 mA Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Inhibit voltage max Zero crossing 60V peak Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 183 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style The co
80. event task may occur For more information on using event tasks see the Logix5000 Controllers Tasks Programs and Routines Programming Manual publication 1756 PM005 If an input module physically resides in a chassis other than where the owner controller is that is a remote chassis connected via the ControlNet network the role of the RPI and the module s COS behavior changes slightly with respect to getting data to the owner The RPI and COS behavior still define when the module will multicast data within its own chassis as described in the previous section But only the value of the RPI determines when the owner controller will receive it over the netwotk Remote Input Modules Connected Via the ControlNet Network When an RPI value is specified for an input module in a remote chassis connected by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the module to multicast data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may ot may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI But the control system will guarantee that the owner controller will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI 29 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System amp As shown in the illustration below the input data within the remote chassis 1s multicast at the configured RPI The ControlNet bridge module
81. for inputs 1492 IFM20F FS120A 4 Fusible Two 4 point isolated groups with four terminals per input and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 IA16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D120 Status indicating Standard with 120V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V AC with extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20F F120A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse status indicators 1756 IA16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS120A 4 1492 IFMAOF FSA 4 1492 IFMADF FS120A 4 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Fusible Isolated with 120 V AC status indicators and four terminals per input Isolated 120V AC DC with four terminals per input Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 289 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 IA32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40D120A 2 Status indicating 120V AC status indicat
82. from the controller to the I O module upon powerup Input structure of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational status of the module Output structure of data continually sent from the controller to the I O module that can modify the module behavior The table lists all possible standard output module tags In each Standard Output Module Configuration Tags application the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Name Configuration or l O0 Data Definition FaultMode Configuration Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of 1bit per point outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State FaultValue Configuration Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of 1 bit per point outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultMode 0 Off 2 0n ProgMode 1 bit per point Configuration Program Mode Used in conjunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program mode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State ProgValue 1 bit per point Configuration Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program mode See ProgMode 0 Off On ProgToFaul
83. has passed internal diagnostics but is not multicasting inputs or it is inhibited Uninhibit connection or establish connection to enable communication to the module OK Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out Check the controller and chassis communication OK Red light The module must be replaced Replace the module 1 0 State Yellow The input is active 1 0 State Red A fault has occurred for this point Check this point at the controller 243 Appendix A 244 Troubleshoot Your Module 310123456 7 AT012 34567 ST 89 10 11 12 1314 15 FLT 8 8 10 11 12 13 14 15 DIAGNOSTIC 3 td 1 0 State 1 0 Fault 1756 IB16D N DCINPUT The status indicators shown are used on input modules 1756 IA8D 1756 1A16 IN AC INPUT 8101234 567 0 RT01234587 K DIAGNOSTIC 1756 1A32 1756 1V32 1756 IB16 1756 IB161 1756 1C16 1756 1G16 1756 1H161 1756 1V16 DC INPUT Module ST012 34567 Ns Status sr8910 112131415 K 1756 IA8D 1756 IA161 1756 IM16l 1756 IN16 amp DCINPUT ACINPUT 0123456 7 3 MIS M E MMEC Hr air Ness ST 8 910 111213 1415 s 67890123 8 312222 2233 S4567 8901 20945 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P Augu
84. hd Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Click a tab that contains the fields that you want to edit 3 Make any changes and then click OK 127 Chapter6 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configure 1 0 Modules in a Remote Chassis 128 There are separate communication modules available for different networks to configure I O modules in a remote chassis ControlNet and EtherNet IP communication modules must be configured in the local chassis and the remote chassis to handle network protocol You can then add new I O modules to the program via the communication module Follow these steps to configure a communication module for the local chassis This module handles communication between the controller chassis and the remote chassis 1 On the Controller Organizer right click I O Configuration and choose New Module EM c GHEENETE S ew Modu 0 B S 1756 Back Le te fa 0117 9 cut Ctri x Bing B ius E Paste Ctrl C Ctrl The Select Module dialog box appears 2 Click the next to Communications for a list of communication modules 3 Choose a communication module for the local chassis and click OK 4 Click OK to accept the default major revision The New Module dialog box appeats 5 Configure the communication module in the local chassis For more information on the ControlLogix ControlNet module see ControlNet Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems publicat
85. is 4V ms maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50 mA range a resistor may be added AC ross the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total outp dv dt rating When adding a P V 2 R If the commuta fault Be sure the waveform 2 Maximum wire size req t current to 50 mA I V R At 50 mA and above the module has a higher commutating resistor for the output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate ing dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500 mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at is a good sinusoid void of any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections ires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE B Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Environmental Specifications 1756 0A161 Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 0A16l 0 60 C 32 140 F ndustrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged N
86. mA 60 C 140 F Load current min 0 15 mA per point Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 21 orth American temperature code T5 EC temperature code T5 Enclosure type 1 convert to traditional True High logic 2 3 None open style TTL outputs are inverted 0 to 0 4V dc low voltage True On Use a NOT instruction in your program to Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0616 Attribute 1756 0G16 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature su
87. max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 420 us max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 120 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 6 2 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 21 1 BTU hr 60 C 140 F Off state voltage max 5V Off state current max 1 5 mA On state current min 2mA On state current max 5 5 mA Inrush current max 250 mA decaying to 3796 in 22 ms without activation 155 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 IB32 Attribute Input impedance max 1756 1B32 5 67 kQ 31 2V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous reinforced insulation type inputs to backplane 250V continuous basic insulation type input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 1 on signal ports North American temperature code T4 IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style U Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category inf
88. max filter time User selectable filter time 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 100 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 5 1 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 17 39 BTU hr Off state voltage max 5V Off state current max 2 75 mA On state current min 5 mA Q 10V AC 60 Hz On state current max 1 2 mA Q 30V AC 60 Hz Inrush current max 250 mA 170 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 IN16 Attribute 1756 IN16 Input impedance max 2 5 kQ 30V AC 60 Hz Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper insulation max wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in Wire category 12 North American temperature code T3C IEC temperature code T3 Enclosure type None open style 1 2 insta Environmental Specifications 1756 IN16 Attribute Temperature operating IE IE IE C 60 C 60 C 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock aximum wire size requires extended housing catalog nu
89. max 5 41 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 18 47 BTU hr Off state voltage max 5V DC Off state current max 1 5 mA On state current min 2 mA Q 10V DC On state current max 10 mA 30V DC Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 173 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 IV16 Attribute 1756 IV16 Inrush current max 250 mA Input impedance max 32 k 30V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper insulation max wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type U Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Environmental Specifications 1756 IV16 Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock None open style Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industr
90. mode In this mode the following events occur Controller program is executing nputs are actively producing data Outputs are actively controlled service A system feature that is performed on user demand such as fuse reset or diagnostic latch reset system side Backplane side of the interface to the I O module tag A named area of the controllers memory where data is stored timestamping A ConttolLogix process that stamps a change in input data with a relative time reference of when that change occurred Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 A agency certification Class Division 2 UL CSA FM CE 55 74 C cage clamp RTB 101 Change of State COS data transmissions 28 diagnostic change of state 78 modules 78 93 Class I Division 2 certification 55 74 communication producer consumer model 27 32 Communication Format 113 117 usage tip 117 configuration accessing module tags 129 altering the default configuration 120 configuring diagnostic input module 126 diagnostic output module 126 modules in remote chassis 128 using RSLogix 5000 software 20 using RSNetWorx software 20 creating a new module 114 dynamic reconfiguration 127 editing in RSLogix 5000 software 127 local versus remote chassis 112 connections 23 direct connection 24 versus rack connections 23 rack connection 24 optimization 24 ControlNet network input modules in remote chassis 29 output modules in remote chassis 33 rack conne
91. ms max Current draw 5 1V 165 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 4 6W 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 15 70 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 0 5 mA per point On state voltage drop max 0 5VDC 2A Current per point max 2A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 16 A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 4A for 10 ms each repeatable every 1 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 2mA Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 OB8l Attribute Isolation voltage 1756 0B8l 250V continuous reinforced insulation type outputs to backplane 250V continuous basic insulation type output to output Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire
92. n protect outputs See publication 4A MQ2 4A 1756 0816 1492 Tpoogj Quick acting 1756 OBaEIU 3 6 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0B16E2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis 1756 0B161 7 None Fused IFM can be used to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs See publication 4A MQ2 4A 1492 TD008 Quick acting 1756 0B1615 7 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 1756 0B32 5 7 None Fused IFM can be used to 5x20mm Littelfuse p n protect outputs See publication 800mA SP001 1003 or 1492 TD008 Schurter p n 216 800 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 63 Chapter 3 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Recommended Fuses Circuit Type Cat No Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Supplier Fuse DC 1756 0cg 8 None Fused IFM can be used to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs See publication 4A MQ2 4A 1492 TD008 Quick acting 1756 06166 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 1756 0Hgi 8 7 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 1756 0V16E 2 3 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis Electronically fused 1756 0v32EU 3 6 Yes Fused on a per group basis Relay 1756 0w16I None Fused IFM can be used to 5x20mm SOC p n protect outputs See publication 6 3A MT 4 6 3A 1492 Tp008 Medium lag 1756 0xg
93. operate the device The ControlLogix standard digital outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix standard digital inputs The exceptions are the AC and DC diagnostic input modules When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information specifically on the compatibility of motor starters to ControlLogix output modules see Appendix E For more information on compatibility of other Rockwell Automation products to ControlLogix output modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG SO001 41 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Features on ControlLogix The table below lists features on ControlLogix standard digital I O modules Standard Digital 1 0 _ lt Modules Some of the features described are not available on all ControlLogix standard digital 1 0 modules The table lists which modules support each feature Topic Page Available Modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIU Je Module Fault Reporting 43 Software Configurable 43 Electronic Keying 44 Module Inhibiting 51 All standard Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and 52 digital input and Schedule Outputs output modules Producer Consumer Model 54 Status Indicator Information 55 Full Class Division 2 Compliance 55 UL CSA FM CE C Tick Ex T V Agency Approvals 55 Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of St
94. s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4 IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 0V32E Attribute Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 0V32E 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC
95. scheduled Voltage category 12 24V DC sink source Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Output delay time OFF to ON 1 ms max ON to OFF 2 ms max Current draw 5 1V 350 mA Current draw 24V 2 5 mA Power dissipation max 3 6 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 12 28 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max 0 5 mA per point On state voltage drop max 1 2VDC 2A Current per point max 2 A 30 C 86 F 1A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 8A 30 C 86 F 4 A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 4 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 2 s Load current min 1 mA per poin Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Technical Specifications 1756 OB16IS Attribute Isolation voltage Module specific Information 1756 OB161S 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output to output Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Chapter 7 Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 Wire type Copper North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as descr
96. sends input data back to the owner controller at least as often as the RPI Remote Chassis 8 pO 485 OJOIOr co o 000 Multicast data O 30 ControlNet 40947 The module s RPI and reserved spot on the network are asynchronous to each other This means there are best and wotst case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated channel data from the module in a networked chassis Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the best case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast with updated channel data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remotely located owner receives the data almost immediately Worst Case RP Multicast Scenario In the worst case scenario the module performs an RPI multicast just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the owner controller will not receive data until the next available network slot IMPORTANT Enabling the COS feature on an input module in a remote chassis allows the module to multicast data at both the RPI rate and when the input ch
97. specific configuration fot your application program IMPORTANT RSLogix 9000 software version 15 and later lets you add 1 0 modules online When using any previous version you must be offline when you create a new module 1 On the Controller Organizer right click I O Configuration and choose New Module h Logic alsia al sae e c saal E celer Aa ee The Select Module dialog box appears Mil Select Module xi Module Analog Communications Controllers Drives Motion Other Specialty FF FR 8 8 Favorites GK Cancel Help A 2 Click the next to Digital for a list for this module group 114 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Chapter 6 Ei Select Module xj Description Vendor Digital al 1756 IA16 16 Point 79 132 AC Input Allen Bradley 1756 IA16I 16 Point 79 132 AC Isolated Input Allen Bradley 1756 IA32 A 32 Point 74V 132V AC Input Allen Bradley 1756 IA8D 8 Point 79V 132V AC Diagnostic Input Allen Bradley 1756 IB16 16 Point 10 31 2 DC Input Allen Bradley 1756 IB16D 16 Point 10V DC Diagnostic Input Allen Bradley 1756 IB161 16 Point 10 30 DC Isolated Input Sink Source Allen Bradley 1756 IB16ISOE 16 Channel Isolated 24V Input Sequence of Events Allen Bradley 1756 IB32 A 32 Poin
98. the module It s tag name is NoLoad See No Load Detection on page 86 for more information Output Verify Word This word indicates when an output is not performing as commanded by the owner controller It s tag name is OutputVerify See Field side Output Verification on page 87 for more information All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because the module is an 8 point module only the first 8 bits bits 0 7 are used in the module fault word Fault bits in the fuse blown word field power loss word no load word and output verify word are logically entered into the module fault word Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 95 Chapter4 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault wotd can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Bit Set Conditions Condition Bit set Communications fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the modules density Fuse blown Field power loss No load Output verify Only the bit affected is set to 1 The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital output modules Bit 31 Bit 0 Module fault Word 1 1 1 1
99. the controller Inhibit module See Module Inhibiting in Chapter 3 for more information Check the box to create a major fault if there is a connection failure with the module while in Run mode Major fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode For important information on this checkbox see Configure a Major Fault to Occur in the Logix5000 Controllers Information and Status Programming Manual publication 1756 PM015 121 Chapter6 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Field Name Description Module Fault The fault box is empty if you are offline The type of connection fault appears in the text box if a fault occurs when the module is online 2 Do one of the following Click Apply to store a change but stay on the dialog box to choose another tab Click OK if you are finished making changes Configuration Tab The Configuration tab lets you program information for a specific point on the module x General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Enable Change of State Enable Diagnostics for Ott On Open Wire Iv Iv M M M Li lv M M m lv M mi M Li M 1 lv m M Li lv Li M M M M M Iv Iv Iv v gt IV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 1 Choose from the options on the Configuration tab Field Name Description Enable Change of State Check ea
100. the point level These modules have a D at the end of the catalog number Electronic fusing These modules have internal electronic fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module These modules have an E at the end of the catalog number Individually These modules have individually isolated inputs or outputs isolated These modules have an I at the end of the catalog number The following tables list where module specific information are located in this section ControlLogix Input Modules ControlLogix Output Modules Module Pae Module Page 1756 IA8D 134 1756 0A8 179 1756 IA16 137 1756 0A8D 182 1756 1A16l 140 1756 OA8E 185 1756 1A32 143 1756 0A16 188 1756 IB186 146 1756 OA161 191 1756 IB16D 149 1756 0B8 194 1756 IB16l 152 1756 OB8EI 197 1756 IB32 155 1756 OB8l 200 1756 1016 158 1756 0B16D 203 1756 1616 161 1756 OB16E 206 1756 IH16l 164 1756 O0B16l 209 1756 IM16l 167 1756 OB161S 212 1756 IN16 170 1756 0B32 215 1756 IV16 173 1756 0C8 218 1756 IV32 176 1756 0G16 221 1756 OH8I 224 1756 ON8 227 1756 OV16E 230 1756 0V32E 233 1756 OW 16 236 1756 0X8l 239 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 131 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Module Type 1756 digital AC input modules The 1756 digital I O modules support these features Features Change of state Software configurable Timestamp of inputs 2
101. time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another processor For a more details see Input Module Operation in Chapter 2 Status Indicator Information Each ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O module has a status indicator on the front of the module that lets you check the module health and operational status of a module The status indicator displays vary for each module For examples of status indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules see Appendix A Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 73 Chapter 4 74 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Full Class Division 2 Compliance All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2 system certification This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in an environment other than only a 100 hazard free IMPORTANT Modules should not be pulled under power nor should a powered RTB be removed in a Class Division 2 environment UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx T V Agency Approvals Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx T V agency approval are marked as such Ultimately all digital modules will have these agency approvals and be matked accordingly Diagnostic Latch of Information Diagnostic latching allows diagnostic I O modules to latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappears
102. wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Oscillatory surge withstand 3kV IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 IC16 Certification 1756 IC16 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 Genera
103. 0 4 6 Certifications 1756 ON8 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Certification 1756 ON8 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 229 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 230 Simplified Schemat
104. 0 4 6 Certifications 1756 IV16 Certification 1756 IV16 10Vr ms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz UL UL Listed ndustrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certi CSA Certi LR69960C ied Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C ied Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with 326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN6 EN6 EN6 EN6 European EN6 000 6 2 Industrial Immunity 000 6 4 Industrial Emissions 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant wi 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 h C Tick Australian AS NZS C SPR 11 Industrial Emissions Radiocommunications Act complian with Ex European EN60 EN60 Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compli 079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmosp 079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X ant with heres Protection n FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Divis ion 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 175 Chapter 7 Module spe
105. 00 us Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital AC output modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default States in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing 1756 OA8D 1756 OA8E Electronically fused per point 1756 0A16 Mechanically fused group 3 15 A 250V AC slow blow 1500 A interruption current Littelfuse p n H2153 15 All other modules Not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs see publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital DC input modules Reverse polarity protection All modules except 1756 1G16 module Change of state Software configurable Timestamp of inputs 100 us for sequence of events modules 200 us for all other modules Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB Keying User defined mechanical 1756 digital DC output modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default States in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing 1756 OB8EI 1756 0B16D 1756 OB16E 1756 0V16E 1756 0V32E Electronicall
106. 068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock IEC 60 operating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Shock IEC 60 nonoperating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 240 Oscillatory surge withstand IEEE C37 90 1 3kV Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Certifications 1756 OX8l Certification 1756 0X8l UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control
107. 1 Meas Control European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emi EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B ssions C Tick AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Em Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with ssions Ex 1 European Union 94 9 EC ATEX D irective compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements II 3 G Ex nA IIC T5 X When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 223 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 0H8l ControlLogix DC 90 146V isolated output module Simplified Schematic DCO Isolated Wiring 1756 0H8l 45V 2 A OUT 0 ZI Ls peep 116 OUT A ld ub 2 L e OUT 0 l4 3 OUT 0 s L RTN DC 1 le 5 OUT 1 Va
108. 1 ic Ia 10 ronpi IN 13 e ie was HE HGS L wa e ie DC COM Technical Specifications 1756 IB16 DC INPUT 8 Attribute 1756 IB16 STE EO Inputs 16 8 points group ST 89 1011 2 3 1415K Voltage category 12 24N DC sink Operating voltage range 10 31 2V DC Input voltage nom 24V DC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 290 us nom 1 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 700 us nom 2 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 100 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 5 1 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 17 39 BTU hr Off state voltage max 5V Off state current max 1 5 MA On state current min 2 mA Q 10V DC On state current max 10 mA Q 31 2V DC 146 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 IB16 Attribute 1756 I1B16 Inrush current max 250 mA peak decaying to lt 37 in 22 ms without activation Input impedance max 3 12 kQ 31 2V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm
109. 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 216 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B32 Attribute EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 1756 0B32 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0B32 Certification 1756 0B32 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Cla LR69960C SA File LR54689C ss Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN6 European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant wi EN6 131 2 Programmable Controllers Cla 131 2 Programmable Controllers Cla Requirements use 8 Zone A amp B h use 11 C Tick Australian AS NZS C Radiocommunications Act complian SPR 11 Industrial Emissions with Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compli EN 60079 15 Potenti
110. 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 IA8D 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 135 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 IA8D Attribute 1756 IA8D Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz
111. 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 157 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 116 ControlLogix DC 30 60V input module 1756 1C16 Simplified Schematic KD KD os Me eel eke c KES o m x I T i ICD D ControlLogix Display D K Backplane 1 N 9 do do Interface S N 11 j j ID KD Group 1 N 13 IN 11 Group 1 ICD KD N 15 IN 14 C2 ICD GND 1 ee ee GND 1 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 IC16 DC INPUT Attribute 1756 IC16 8 Inputs 16 8 points group sT012345670 ST 89 10 11 1213 14 15K Voltage category 48V DC sink Operating voltage range 30 55V DC 60 C 140 F 30 60V DC 55 C 131 F Input voltage nom
112. 1756 0A8D Attribute 1756 0A8D Output delay time OFF to ON 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 11 ms Q 50 Hz ON to OFF 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 11 ms Q 50 Hz Current draw 5 1V 175 mA Current draw Q 24V 250 mA Power dissipation max 5 3 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 18 0 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 3 mA per point On state voltage drop max 2 5V peak Q 0 5 A 3V peak Q 1 A co rrent per point max 1A Q 30 C 86 F linear derating 0 5 A 60 C 140 F linear derating O rrent per module max 8 A 30 C 86 F linear derating 4 A 60 C 140 F linear derating Surge current per point 8 A for 43 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 30 C 86 F 5 A for 43 ms per point repeatable every 1 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 10 mA per point Isolation voltage 125V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1200V AC for 2 s Inhibit voltage max Zero crossing 25V peak Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE
113. 2010 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules This chapter provides an overview of the ControlLogix digital I O modules to explain to you how they operate Topic Page 1 0 Module in the ControlLogix System 14 Types of ControlLogix Digital I 0 Modules 14 Parts Illustration of the ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Module 16 ControlLogix digital I O modules are input output modules that provide On Off detection and actuation By using the producer consumer network model digital I O modules can produce information when needed while providing additional system functions Available Features The table lists several features available on ControlLogix digital I O modules ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Module Features Feature Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP Description You can remove and insert modules and removable terminal blocks RTB while power is applied Producer consumer communication This communication is an intelligent data exchange between modules and other system devices in which each module produces data without first being polled System time stamp of data A 64 bit system clock places a time stamp on the transfer of data between the module and its owner controller within the local chassis Module level fault reporting and field side diagnostic detection Fault and diagnostic detection capabilities that provide you the information necessary to most effectively and efficiently use your m
114. 20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 1492 IFM20D24N 1492 IFM20D24A 2 1492 IFM20D24 3 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20F F24A 2 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for inputs 291 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 IV16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1756 IV32 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFMAOF 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IF
115. 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 207 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 OB16E Attribute 1756 0B16E Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Oscillatory surge withstand 3kV IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 0B16E Certification 1756 0B16E UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A a
116. 5 Chapter 4 86 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Current flow with output On No Load Detection For each output point no load detects the absence of field wiring or a missing load from each output point in the Off state only The output circuit on a diagnostic output module has a current sensing optoisolator used in parallel with the output transistor Current flows through this sensing circuit only when the output is Off as shown in the simplified diagram V Current Sense Output Transistor Current flow with output Off 41681 Diagnostic output modules list a minimum load current specification 1756 OA8D 10 mA amp 1756 OB16D 3 mA In the On state the module must be connected to a load that will draw a minimum current equal to these values If a connected load is sized in accordance with the minimum load current specification diagnostic output modules are capable of sensing current through the optoisolator and the load when the output point is Off Follow these steps to enable no load detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane Enable
117. 584 CSA CSA Certi CSA Certi LR69960C ied Process Control Equipment See C ied Process Control Eq SA File LR54689C uipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File CE European EN6 EN6 EN6 EN6 European EN6 326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial 000 6 2 Industrial Immunity 000 6 4 Industrial Emissions 131 2 Programmable Controllers Cla Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant wi 131 2 Programmable Controllers Cla Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with Requirements use 8 Zone A amp B h use 11 C Tick Radiocommunications Act complian SPR 11 Industrial Emissions Australian AS NZS C with Ex European EN60 EN60 Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compli ant with 079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n 079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T3 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Divis ion 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV 1 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 151 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 IB161 ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated input module
118. 58E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The following table lists tags used in the Source and Destination fields of the message instructions Source and Destination Field Tags Source Tag Description Enable 32 Points Parameter used to determine which points are enabled for DINT the service That is if bit 0 1 for Reset Fuse then point 0 has its electronic fuse reset Results 32 Points Pass 0 Fail 1 result for the service That is if bit 0 1 for DINT the results of the Reset Fuse then the Reset Fuse failed for point 0 If you are using RSLogix 5000 software versions 10 and later choose the physical location slot number and data type in the Source Element and Destination fields Communication Tab The Communication tab provides information on the path of the message instruction For example the slot number of a 1756 OA8D module distinguishes exactly which module a message is designated for IMPORTANT Use the Brown button to see a list of the 1 0 modules in the system You choose a path when you choose a module from the list You must name an I O module during initial module configuration to choose a path for your message instruction Click OK to set the path Message Configuration Slot4 ChO Reset Fuse Configuration Communication Tag Path Slot4 DA8D Browse Slot4 OA8D Communication IL Misti ST TN Path
119. 6 Appendix G Cable Oyerview c4 aa sone Ps Ebo dre bets Eo AE ade 287 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 Introduction Who Should Use This Manual Additional Resources Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Preface This manual describes how to install configure and troubleshoot your ControlLogix digital I O modules There is also a complete listing of digital input and output modules including specifications and wiring diagrams in Chapter 7 You must be able to program and operate a Rockwell Automation ControlLogix controller to efficiently use your digital I O module If you need additional information refer to the related documentation listed below The following table lists related ControlLogix products and documentation Related Documentation Cat No Resource 1756 A4 1756 A7 1756 A10 1756 A13 1756 A17 ControlLogix Chassis Series B Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN080 1756 A5XT 1756 A4LXT 1756 A7LXT ControlLogix XT Chassis Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN637 1756 PB75 1756 PH75 1756 PC75 1756 PA72 1756 PB72 1756 PA75 ControlLogix Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN613 1756 PAXT 1756 PBXT ControlLogix XT Power Supplies Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN639 1756 IF16 1756 IF6CIS 1756 IF6l 1756 IF8 1756 IR6I 1756 IT6l 1756 IT6I2 1756 OF4 1756 OF6CI 1756 OF6VI 1756 OF8
120. 60 C 140 F 1756 0A16 16 16 16 4 2 Only 2 per group Only 1 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 8 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 281 Appendix E Motor Starters for Digital I O Modules Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 24V AC 60 Hz Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 1756 0N8 4 30 C 86 F 4 30 C 86 F None None None 3 60 C 140 F 3 60 C 140 F Determine the Maximum Number of Motor Starters To determine the maximum number of motor starters that can be used by any 1756 digital I O module refer to this example Number of Motor Starters to be Used Step Value used in this example 1 Choose your motor starter Allen Bradley Bulletin 500 Size 3 120V AC 60 Hz 2 3 Poles Inrush 1225VA Sealed 45VA 2 Determine the number of motor starters required for 12 size 3 motor starters your application 3 Choose a ControlLogix digital output module 1756 0A161 Output voltage 74 265V AC Output steady state current per point 2A maximum 30 C 86 F amp 1A maximum 60 C 140 F Linear derating Output steady state current per module 5A maximum 30 C 86 F amp 4A maximum 60xC linear derating Output surge current p 20A maximum for 43 ms repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F 4 Determine the maximum environmental operating 50 C 122 F temperature 5 Confirm the voltage range i
121. 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g Emissions 234 CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0V32E Attribute ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 1756 0V32E 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM Q 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0V32E Certification 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 1756 0V32E UL UL Listed ndustrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certi CSA Certi LR69960C ied Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C ied Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File CE European EN6 EN6 EN6 EN6 European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with 326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements 000 6 2 Industrial Immunity 000 6 4 Ind
122. 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B16D Attribute 1756 0B16D Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 204 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B16D Attribute Shock nonoperating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 1756 0B16D 50g
123. 74 132V AC 47 63 Hz ELECTRONICALLY FUSED Dutputdelsy ame OFF to ON 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 1 ms Q 50 Hz ON to OFF 9 3 ms Q 60 Hz 1 ms Q 50 Hz Current draw 5 1V 200 mA Current draw Q 24V 250 mA Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 185 Chapt er 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 OA8E Attribute 1756 0A8E Power dissipation max 5 5 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 18 76 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 3 mA per point On state voltage drop max 4V peak 2 A Current per point max 2 A 60 C 140 F Current per module max 8A Q 30 C 86 F linear derating 4A Q 60 C 140 F linear derating Surge current per point 20 A for 43 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 10 mA per point Isolation voltage 125V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1200V AC for 2 s Inhibit voltage max Zero crossing 25V peak Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style U Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalo
124. 8 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60 Relative humidity 068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60 Vibrati on 068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock IEC 60 operating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Shock IEC 60 honoperating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Emissi 150 ons CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 IB16D Attribute 1756 IB16D ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 IB16D Certifications 1756 IB16D 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65
125. Appendix B Follow these steps to enable or disable field power loss detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 81 Chapter 4 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 82 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features lil Module Properties Local 2 1756 IA8D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Enable Change of State Enable Diagnostics for Off gt On v Off v Wire Vv v Vv v v Iv Vv v Enable Input Filter Time Diag Points M Latchin Off gt On On gt Off g 0 7 ims vl9ms vl On gt Open MAGA XI SI SI XI XI XI XI XI XI SI SI XI XI XI XI XI XI SI SI SI XI XI XI XI MV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the field power loss column Click the box to enable the feature specific point Clear the check mark to disable the feature for a specific point 3 Click OK The features described in this section are available on all ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules Configurable Point level Output Fault States Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states either On Off or Hold in case of a communication failure or Program mode IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit a diagnostic output module it enters the Program mode and
126. Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 178 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0A8 ControlLogix AC 74 265V output module Simplified Schematic 1756 0A8 5V L1 0 2 m 7 va BED on ie UA 3 DI D D o AX L1 0 OUT 1 Yg AY pa S le sero lose 2h 7 OUT 0 Group 0 L1 0 K Ia OUT 2 Group 0 D IB 2 Ar ARE Backplane Interface ich I ie 0UT3 Display To 19 L1 0 D KD Not used Surge Current Chart i D Ie BUE Surge i i 20A L1 1 i ic OUTS fie is E Group 1 TN ie Ies OUTS Group 1 3 L1 1 D Ia Our 20 1 2A T L1 iG ie Not Used _ EG 12 L T 0 43 ms CN Time Daisy Chain to Other RTBs L1 Technical Specifications 1756 0A8 Q AC OUTPUT 3 Attribute 1756 0A8 Outputs 8 4 points group ST0123456709 K Voltage category 120 240V AC 8 Operating voltage range 74 265V AC 47 63 Hz dun
127. Area 20859 M The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie NEMA Clamp Follow these steps to wire a NEMA clamp 1 Strip 8 mm 5 16 in maximum length of wire 2 Turn the terminal screw counterclockwise 3 Insert the stripped end of the wire under the plate on the terminal TS ap ep DID DA D DA DD D D Kp DE A Strain Relief Area 40201 M 4 Turn the terminal screw clockwise until the wire is secured The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grouped with a plastic tie Spring Clamp Follow these steps to wire a spring clamp 1 Strip 11 mm 7 16 in maximum length of wire 102 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Install the ControlLogix I O Module Chapter 5 2 Insert the screwdriver into the outer hole of the RTB to depress the spring loaded clamp 3 Insert the wire into the open terminal and remove the screwdriver Strain Relief Area 20860 M IMPORTANT Make sure the wire and not the screwdriver is inserted into the open terminal to prevent damage to the module The open section at the bottom of the RTB is called the strain relief area The wiring from the connections can be grou
128. C 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0A8 Certification 1756 0A8 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 181 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 0A8D ControlLogix AC 74 132V diagnostic output module Simplified Schematic No 1756 0A8D IN Used mz oct Ced eee HoH
129. C DC with extra terminals for outputs Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 299 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable y 1756 0V32E 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM4OF F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra I terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC j blown fuse indicators for outputs 7560W 6l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four l terminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals and j 120V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 IMF40F FS120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four t
130. CE 83 ETE P CE SISIelel Be D Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0A8D 12 A for 500 us Off state detection only On state detection only Configurable max width and max time delay from zero cross Detects at 25V peak min firmware phase locked loop 1 ms 1756 0A8D 8 diagnostic electronic fusing 4 points group Diagnostic Control Block with ControlLogix Opto and Transformer Isolation L1 Backplane t o VAC its A Interface a GATE L J Verify Lu rm Group 0 4 Verity Y No Load QUT L2 Display Loss of Field Power Surge Current Chart med to Other RTBs Surge 30 C 86 F BA g 86 F E Surge 60 C 140 PF non D 5A 3 1A Continuous 30 C 86 F ere Continuous 60 C 140 F 0 43 ms Time Diagnostics 1756 0A8D Attribute Short trip min No load Output verification Pulse test Field power loss zero cross Time stamp of diagnostics Technical Specifications 1756 0A8D AC OUTPUT e Attribute 3 Outputs ST 012345670 0S Voltage category DIAGNOSTIC 182 120V AC Operating voltage range 74 132V AC 47 63 Hz Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Technical Specifications
131. ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Input Modules 1756 IA8D 1756 IA16 1756 1A161 1756 IA32 1756 IB16 1756 IB16D 1756 IB16I 1756 1B32 1756 IC16 1756 1616 1756 IH161 1756 IM161 1756 IN16 1756 1V16 1756 1V32 Output Modules 1756 048 1756 0A8D 1756 OA8E 1756 0416 Eo e un E a 1756 OB16E 1756 OB161 1756 0B161S 1756 0B32 1756 0C8 1756 0616 1756 0H8l 1756 ON8 1756 OV16E 1756 0V32E 1756 0181 1756 OX8I User Manual Allen Bradley ait n t 2 Td a yi HN 1 Rockwell Allen Bradley Rockwell Software Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and d
132. Copy Fie c Cop Fie Souce WHO Irfomation l Souce WHO Infomatien 1C Dest WHO vandal Dex WHO serial number Length 2 Lengt 4 r mi 5 Copy File Copy Fie I 4 Scurcs WHO_Inlormatior 15 Sowce WHO Informaton 4 Des WHO asciLshinglO Dew WHO olnng_lergth Length x Lengh 1 End 17 MainRoutine 41 A1 Rung 0 constantly polls the module for WHO status To conserve bandwidth only poll for status when necessary Rung 1 extracts the product type and catalog code Rung 2 extracts the module s major and minor revisions Rung 3 extracts the module s status information Rung 4 extracts the vendor ID and serial number Rung 5 extracts the module s ASCII text string and the length of the text string in bytes 216 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C The table defines the values returned for each rung Rung Module ID Retrieved Description 1 Product Type Module s product type 7 Digital 1 0 10 Analog I O Catalog Code Module s catalog number 2 Major Revision Module s major revision Minor Revision Module s minor revision 3 Status Module s status Multiple bits listed Bit 0 0 Unowned 1 Owned Bit 1 Reserved Bit 2 0 Unconfigured 1 Configured Bit 3 Reserved Bits 7 4 Forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status 0 Self Test 1 Hash update in progress 2 Communications fault 3
133. DC relays 1492 XIMF F24 2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight 24V channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander with eight Expander feed through channels 1756 0B16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFMADF FS 2 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output Isolated with 240V AC DC and four terminals per output 297 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable yp 1756 OB16IS 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IMF40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492
134. Destination Length bytes Device manufacturer s vendor ID WHO Information 0 WHO vendor 2 that is 1 AB INT Device s product type WHO Information 2 WHO product type 2 that is 7 Digital 1 0 INT Device s catalog code which maps to its WHO Information 4 WHO catalog code 2 catalog number INT Device s major revision WHO Information 6 WHO major revision 1 SINT Device s minor revision WHO Information 7 WHO minor revision 1 SINT Device s internal status WHO Information 8 WHO status 2 Bit 0 0 unowned 1 owned INT Bit 2 0 unconfigured 1 configured Bits 7 4 forms a 4 bit number indicating Device Specific Status For Digital 1 0 0 Self Test 1 Hash update in progress 2 Communication fault 3 Not owned 4 Unused 5 Internal fault module needs to be flash updated 6 Run mode 7 Program mode N A for input modules Bit 8 0 no fault 1 Minor recoverable fault that is backplane error detected Bit 9 0 no fault 1 Minor non recoverable fault Bit 10 0 no fault 1 Major recoverable fault Bit 11 0 2 no fault 1 Major non recoverable fault that is module needs to be reflashed Bits 15 12 unused Device s serial number WHO Information 10 WHO serial number 4 DINT Number of characters in the text string WHO Information 14 WHO string length 1 SINT Device s ASCII text string describing the WHO Information 15 WHO_ascii_string 32 module Publication 1756 UMO0
135. Digital 1 0 Module Features Latched diagnostic features can be cleared by the Reset Diagnostic Latch setvice IMPORTANT Diagnostic latches are also reset through a software reset or when the 1 0 module s power is cycled Follow these steps to enable diagnostic latch of information 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab L Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8E 3 1 General Connection Module Info mic Diagnostics Backplane Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Field Power Loss Latching ott v ott v ott ott lott v ott _y ott EREREREREREREREI T3883 Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Made state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following Click a box to enable diagnostic latching for a specific point Clear the check mark to disable diagnostic latching for a specific point 3 Click OK Fault and Status Reporting ControlLogix digital input modules multicast fault and status data to any Between Inpu t Modules owner listening controllers All input modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some output modules also use additional and Controllers wotds to indicate fault conditions The table lists the tag that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a standard input module Tag
136. EE C37 80 1 Oscillatory surge withstand Certifications 1756 0A16 3kV Certification 1756 0A16 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 190 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 OA16l ControlLogix AC 74 265V isolated output module Simplified Schematic
137. EN P August 2010 Install the ControlLogix I O Module Choose the Extended depth There are two housing options you must consider when wiring your ControlLogix digital I O module standard depth or extended depth Housing Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter 5 When you order an RTB for your I O module you receive a standard depth housing If your application uses heavy gauge wiring you can order an extended depth housing The extended depth housing does not come with an RTB Standard depth Housing Extended depth Housing 30484 M IMPORTANT The housings shown are used with a spring clamp RTB but the capacity for each remains the same regardless of RTB type Cat No RTB Type Wire Capacity Number of Wires 1756 TBNH NEMA clamp 1756 TBSH Spring clamp Eis Standard depth 20 position 338 Ni 36 18 Ae wires 1756 23 14 AWG wires 756 TBCH Cage clamp 0 52 in 1756 TBS6H Spring clamp 36 position 1756 TBE Any RTB that uses Extended depth 40 14 AWG wires heavy gauge wiring 628 mm 0 97 in 2 105 Chapterb X Install the ControlLogix I O Module Cabinet Size Considerations with Extended depth Housing When you use an extended depth housing catalog number 1756 TBE the I O module depth is increased The diagram shows the difference i
138. EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Simplified schematic 1756 0B16D ControlLogix DC 19 2 30V diagnostic output module Group 1 DC Short Circuit 3 5V 9V Detect l ay Optoisolation k Wek F 3 nn EI Z K p p 3 OUT ControlLogix M 6 a oh ay Output Verify No Load was Interface play Output Verity No Loa Surge Current Chart AA Surge 5 2A Continuous 30 C 86 F 3 Continuous 60 C 140 F 0 10 ms Time Q DCOUTPUT 3 58101234567 Fr012345679 ST 8 9 10111213 14 15 FLT 8 9 10111213 1415 DIAGNOSTIC Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1756 0B16D DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 DC 0 ND 0 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 DC 1 m T Dwg m Dao Ty t KC cn c cn 1 Y Dy ED AY yy CY EDDY d I o d X c R amp Ro n nms 52G20 ND 1 ND 1 Used MIN Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Diagnostics 1756 0B16D Group 1 Attribute 1756 0B16D Short trip 8 A for 180 ms 10 A for 120 ms No load Off state detection only Outpu
139. FIT presence or absence of various faults Fuse status This display is only found on electronically fused modules and Risa indicates the state of the module s fuse See Appendix A for examples of status indicators on ControlLogix digital I O modules Full Class I Division 2 Compliance All ControlLogix digital I O modules maintain CSA Class I Division 2 system certification This allows the ControlLogix system to be placed in an environment other than only a 100 hazard free IMPORTANT Modules should not be pulled under power nor should a powered RTB be removed in a Class Division 2 environment UL CSA FM CE C Tick Ex T V Agency Approvals Any ControlLogix digital I O modules that have obtained UL CSA FM CE C Tick Ex T V agency approval ate marked as such Ultimately all digital modules will have these agency approvals and be marked accordingly Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 55 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Features Specific to Standard Input Modules 56 The features described in this section are available on all ControlLogix digital input modules Data Transfer on Either Cyclic Time or Change of State Digital input modules always send data at the RPI but they send data only at a change of state if the COS feature 1s enabled COS is mote efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occuts The table describes the two ways a module sends d
140. Fault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FuseBlown Input data Fuse is Blown An electronic or mechanical fuse has detected a short or 1 bit per point Standard Output Module Output Data Tags overload condition for an output point All FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user 0 No fault 1 Fault Name Configuration or I 0 Data Definition CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with 8 bytes scheduled outputs and coordinated system time CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicating the time CST timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data Output data Off On Status for the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point 254 0 Off 1 On Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Diagnostic Output Module Configuration Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Configuration or l 0 Data Definition FaultLatchEn Configuration Fault is Latched If enabled for a point any NoLoad OutputVerifyFault or 1bit per point FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until the user clears the fault This does not affect FuseBlown it is always latched 0 Disable 1 Enable latching FaultMode Configuration Fault Mode Used in conjunction with FaultValue to configure the state of 1bit per point outputs when a communications fault occu
141. G SO001 69 Chapter4 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility Features on ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Modules 70 ControlLogix diagnostic digital outputs are capable of directly driving the ControlLogix diagnostic digital inputs When diagnostics are used a shunt resistor is required for leakage current For more information on the compatibility of motor starters to ControlLogix output modules see Appendix E The table below lists features on ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules The features are described later in this section IMPORTANT Some of the features described in this section are not available on all ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules The following table lists which modules support each feature Topic Page Available Modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 71 Module Fault Reporting 7 Software Configurable 72 Electronic Keying 72 Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and 72 Schedule Outputs Producer Consumer Model 73 Status Indicator Information 73 oa ae input Full Class Division 2 Compliance 74 UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx TUV Agency 74 Approvals Diagnostic Latch of Information 74 Diagnostic Timestamp 75 8 Point AC 16 Point DC 75 Point level Fault Reporting 76 Software Configurable Filter Times 79 Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Modul
142. Hz 213 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 0B16IS Attribute EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 1756 OB161S 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 OB161S 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Certification 1756 0B16IS UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex 1 214 European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X When marked See the Product Certification link at
143. Hz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0A8D 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Certification 1756 0A8D UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations T V T V Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 184 Publication 1756
144. IFM cable onto the module Status indicators Indicators display the status of communication module health and input output devices Indicators help in troubleshooting anomalies Connectors pins Input output power and grounding connections are made to the module through these pins with the use of an RTB or IFM Locking tab The locking tab anchors the RTB or IFM cable on the module maintaining wiring connections Slots for keying Mechanically keys the RTB to prevent inadvertently making the wrong wire connections to your module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module Identification and Status Information Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 1 Each ControlLogix I O module maintains specific identification information that separates it from all other modules This information assists you in tracking all the components of your system For example you can track module identification information to be aware of exactly what modules are located in any ControlLogix rack at any time While retrieving module identity you can also retrieve the module s status Module Identification and Status Information Item Description Product type Module s product type such as Digital 1 0 or Analog 1 0 module Product code Module s catalog number Major revision Module s major revision number Minor revision Module s minor revision num
145. IFM20F F240 2 Extra terminals with 240V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIM20120 8R Relay Master 20 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM20120 16R 20 pin master with sixteen 120V I AC relays 1492 XIM20120 16RF 20 pin master with sixteen 120V AC relays with fusing 1492 XIM120 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 120V AC relays 1492 XIMF F120 2 Fusible Expander Expander with eight 120V channels with blown fuse indicators 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander with eight Expander feed through channels 1756 0A16 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40 FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40 FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS1 20 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 IFM40F FS 120 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 294 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 0B8 1492 IFM20F Fee
146. IFM40F FS 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC and four terminals per output 1756 0832 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExZ x cable length a 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM40D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and I extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra I terminals for outputs 1492 IFM40F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC l blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 XIM4024 8R Relay Master 40 pin master with eight 24V j DC relays 1492 XIM4024 16R 40 pin master with sixteen 24V I DC relays 1492 XIM4024 16RF 40 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIM24 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 24V l DC relays 1492 XIMF F24 2 Fusible Expander Eight channel expander with 24V AC blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM24 16RF Expander with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIMF 2 Feed through Expander with eight Expander feed through channels 298 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 0C8 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F
147. Load condition with an output On Description The No Load diagnostic see page 86 can only detect a fault that is set the No Load bit when an output point is in the Off state But you may find it useful to be made aware when operating conditions for that point may reveal a potential No Load condition If you perform a pulse test on an output point while it is in the On state the output point is commanded to be Off briefly The pulse test reports a failure because conditions when the point is Off indicate the possible absence of a field device in this case though the No Load bit will not be set see Point level Fault Reporting on page 76 The Pulse Test does not guarantee the absence of a load It merely indicates this condition is possible IMPORTANT Follow these steps to perform a pulse test by using RSLogix 5000 software Your project must be online for you to perform the pulse test 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Pulse Test tab imi Module Properties Local 4 1756 0B16D 2 1 x General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Status Running Backplane 2 Click Test for a particular point on the module to perform a pulse test 3 Click OK 90 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Point level Electronic Fusing Diagnostic output modules use ele
148. Logix 5000 software In addition to the status indicator display on the module RSLogix 5000 software will alert you to fault conditions Fault conditions are reported in for Troubleshooting p Pda Warning signal on the main screen next to the module This occurs when the connection to the module is broken Message in a screen s status line Notification in the Tag Editor General module faults are also reported in the Tag Editor Diagnostic faults are reported only in the Tag Editor Status on the Module Info tab The following windows display fault notification in RSLogix 5000 software z ela fie vlr edel ooo 3l E gt a M Battey OK SF 1 0 Not Responding 4 8 LN A Controller myhse Controller Tags i Controller Fault Handler 3 Power Up Hendler E Unscheduled Programs G Motion Groups Ungrouped Axes 3 Add On Instructions Data Types Gi User Defined e Cg Strings Cif Add On Defined amp Of Predefined 8 Defines a E I O Configuration 1756 Backplane 1756 4 Pl 5 1756 HSC hsc m fa 8 1756 63 myhsc A warning icon En appeats in the I O Configuration tree when a communication fault occuts Fault Message in Status Line E Module Properties Local 5 1756 HSC 1 1 General Connection Module Ir Counter Configuration Output Configuration Backplane Identification Vendor Product Type Product Code Revision Serial Number Pro
149. M40D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1756 048 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status 1492 CABLExW x cable length indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS120 2 Isolated with extra terminals with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS120 4 Isolated with four terminals with 120V AC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS240 4 Isolated with four terminals with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 292 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 0A8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS120 4 Status indicating Isolated with 120V AC status 1492 CABLExV x cable length indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS120 2
150. MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 177 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 IV32 Attribute 1756 1V32 EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 IV32 Certification 1756 1V32 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM
151. Module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Install the ControlLogix 1 0 Module This chapter provides step by step instructions and illustrations for installing ControlLogix I O modules Topics include general guidelines for installing an I O module keying a removable terminal block RTB and how to use the correct RTB wiring type and housing depending on your system application Topic TRage Install the 1 0 Module 97 Key the Removable Terminal Block 99 Connect the Wiring 100 Assemble the Removable Terminal Block and Housing 104 Install the Removable Terminal Block 107 Remove the Removable Terminal Block 108 Remove the Module from the Chassis 109 You can install or remove a ControlLogix I O module while chassis power is applied Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP provides the flexibility to maintain modules without having to stop production Although the module is designed to support RIUP when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature WARNING When you insert or remove the module while backplane power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installments Be sure the power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Repeated electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the
152. Module Properties dialog box appears with tabs to access additional information The Connection tab is the default W Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane TIP Tabs can be selected in any order The following examples are for instructional purposes 120 Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Chapter 6 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Connection Tab The Connection tab on the Module Properties dialog box lets you enter a requested packet interval RPI The RPI provides a defined maximum period of time when data is transferred to the owner controller W Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI 2 04 ms 0 2 750 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 1 Choose from the options on the Connection tab Field Name Requested Packet Interval RPI Description Enter an RPI value or use the default See Requested Packet Interval RPI in Chapter 2 for more information Check the box to prevent communication between the owner controller and the module This option allows for maintenance of the module without faults being reported to
153. N 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 226 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0N8 ControlLogix AC 10 30V output module Simplified Schematic Daisy Chain to Other RTBs 1730 ONG 5V L1 0 i LTI L1 0 ie D OUT 0 EX Ux H L n ay L1 0 K S77 OUT A AY eoo d OUT 0 L1 0 ID Ig OUT 2 ControlLogix Backplane Interface n I I QUT H XD 7 Display CO wD 0 e E Not Used Surge Current Chart T LA i JL OUT4 20A Surge LED i GIL OUT5 KD Ki t Group 1 S IE c OUT6 3 ae cs OUT 7 7A ie Va gg Not Used L2 m y fi a 0 43ms S Time CA Technical Specifications 1756 0N8
154. N P August 2010 Input Module Operation Input Modules in a Local Chassis Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 In traditional I O systems controllers poll input modules to obtain their input status In the ControlLogix system a controller does not poll digital input modules Instead the modules multicast their data either upon Change of State ot periodically The frequency depends on the options chosen during configuration and where in the control system that input module physically resides IMPORTANT This is called the Producer Consumer model The input module is the producer of input data and the controller is the consumer of the data All ControlLogix inputs are updated asynchronous to the controller s task execution In other words an input may be updated in the controller at any time during the controller s execution of the tasks it is configured to run The input device determines when the input is sent based on its configuration An input module s behavior also varies depending upon whether it operates in the local chassis or in a remote chassis The following sections detail the differences in data transfers between these set ups When a module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller the following two configuration parameters will affect how and when an input module multicasts data Requested Packet Interval RPT Change of State C
155. NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions with Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compli ant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Divis ion 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 205 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 0B16E ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V electronically fused output module Simplified Schematic 1730 0816 Display Optoisolation DC 0 0 m EN Oo OUT 1 OUT 0 T TD T E fd P LJ Group 0 OUT 3 ia E OUT 2 Group 0 M m E l 6 5 A gt d OUT 0 Daisy Chain to OUTS ee ie 0UT 4 A z M Other RTBs OUT 7 Ie I5 OUT6 ControlLogix Electronic RTN a Backplane Fuse Circuitry OUT 0 DC 0 4 Ies IGS RTN OUT 0 Interface R OUT 9 Id
156. OS Requested Packet Interval RPI This interval defines the slowest rate at which a module multicasts its data to the owner controller The time ranges from 200 us 750 ms and 1s sent to the module with all other configuration parameters When the specified time frame elapses the module will multicast data This is also called a cyclic update 21 Chapter 2 28 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System COS Multicast RPI Multicast Change of State COS This parameter instructs the module to transfer data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off or Off to On The transition is referred to as a Change of State The module s Change of State COS feature defaults to Enabled for both On to Off and Off to On COS selection occurs on a per point basis but all module data is multicast when any point enabled for COS changes state COS is more efficient than RPI because it multicasts data only when a change occurs You must specify an RPI regardless of whether you enable COS If a change does not occur within the RPI timeframe the module still will multicast data at the rate specified by the RPI For example if an input is changing state consistently every two seconds and the RPI is set at 750 ms the data transfer will look like the illustration 500 750 1250 1500 1750 2250 2500 2750 1 Second 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 41381 Because the RPI and COS functions are asynchronous to the progra
157. Program mode if comm failure Outputs go to FaultMode if comm failure 255 Appendix B Tag Definitions Diagnostic Output Module Input Data Tags Name Configuration or 1 0 Data Definition CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input 8 bytes data including fusing see BlownFuse NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data Input data Data Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output 1 bit per point module This is used to verify proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 2 On Fault Input data Fault Status An ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and 1 bit per point 1 0 data for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss or CommFault FieldPwrloss Input data Field Power Loss AC output diagnostic detects that field power has failed 1 bit per point or is disconnected from the module No Load also is detected 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown Input data Fuse is Blown An electronic or mechanic
158. Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 OV m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 219 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 0C8 Attribute 1756 0C8 EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0C8 Certification 1756 0C8 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Prot
159. Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Field Name Description Style Leave blank Constant Leave blank Open MESSAGE Configuration Leave the box blank if you do NOT want to automatically access the Message Configuration screen when OK is clicked You still can access the Message Configuration screen later by following the procedures on page 264 7 Click OK Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 263 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Enter Message Configuration After creating a tag you must enter certain parameters for the message configuration This information is entered on the Configuration and Communication tabs of the Message Configuration dialog box The Message Configuration dialog box is accessed by clicking the box with the ellipses in the Message Control field MSG Message EN Message Control Sk Ch Reset Fig IN End In RSLogix 5000 software version 10 and later the Message Configuration dialog boxes changed significantly to make it easier for you to configure your messages For example in version 9 and earlier depending on the Message Type you are required to configure some combination of the following Service Code Object Type Object ID Object Attribute Source Number of Elements Destination In ve
160. RSLogix 5000 software alerts you to the possibility of a multiple owner controller situation and lets you inhibit the connection before changing the module s configuration When changing configuration for a module with multiple owners we recommend the connection be inhibited Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 To prevent other owners from receiving potentially erroneous data do the following steps when changing a module s configuration in a multiple owner controller scenario while online 1 For each owner controller inhibit the controller s connection to the module either in the software on the Connection tab or the pop up window warning of the multiple owner controller condition 2 Make the appropriate configuration data changes in the software For detailed information on using RSLogix 5000 software to change configuration see Chapter 6 3 Repeat step 1 and step 2 for all owner controllers making the exact same changes in all controllers 4 Disable the Inhibit box in each owner s configuration Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 37 Chapter 2 Notes 38 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter J ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Introduction This chapter describes devices compatible with ControlLogix I O modules and features that are specific to v
161. See Software Configurable Filter Times in Chapter 4 for more information a Click Apply to store a changes but stay on the dialog box to choose another tab b Click OK if you are finished making changes 123 Chapter6 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configure a Standard Input Module 124 The table lists the ControlLogix standard digital input modules and the features that can be configured Input Modules 1756 IA16 1756 IA16l 1756 1A32 1756 IB16 1756 IB16l 1756 IB32 1756 1C16 1756 1G16 1756 IH16l 1756 IM161 1756 IN16 1756 IV16 1756 IV32 Configured Feature Description Change of state See page 56 Input filter times See page 59 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Configure a Standard Output Module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 6 The table lists the ControlLogix standard digital output modules and the features that can be configured Input Modules Configured Features Description 1756 0A16 Output state in Program In Program or Fault mode a mode controller will not run the 1756 0A16l control program to Output state in Fault mode determine the state of the 1756 048 Transition from Program outputs based on state to Fault state information received from 1756 OA8E the inputs If there is a fault you can choose whether the 1756 OB16E outputs will behave as if the cont
162. Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 OB8El 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Certification 1756 OB8EI UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations o
163. System Best Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the best case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just before the reserved network slot is made available In this case the remotely located output module receives the data almost immediately Worst Case RPI Multicast Scenario In the worst case scenario the owner controller sends the output data just after the reserved network slot has passed In this case the output module does not receive data until the next available network slot IMPORTANT These best and worst case scenarios indicate the time required for output data to transfer from the owner controller to the module once the owner controller has produced it They do not take into account the user program time in the owner controller The receipt of new data is a function of the length of the user program and its asynchronous relationship with the RPI The owner controller updates remotely located digital output modules at the end of each task as well as at the RPI as described earlier in this section if your application uses e 1756 CNB D or 1756 CNBR D modules e RSLogix 5000 software version 8 or later Remote Output Modules Connected Via the EtherNet IP Network When remote digital output modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network the controller sends output data at the end of each program scan within the local chassis when either the RPI timer expires or
164. System Local Chassis 8 The illustration below shows how this rack connection option eliminates the need for three separate connections The owner controller in the local chassis communicates with all the I O modules in the remote chassis but uses only one connection The ControINet bridge module sends data from the modules simultaneously at the RPI Remote Chassis 8 6 amp COCE 26 oo oO oO Ed top ET je oa A js a LI Rack connection for all 1 0 in 9 remote chassis IO lO zd ControlNet 41021 Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage We recommend that you use a tack connection for applications in which standard digital I O modules are used non fused digital output modules are used your ownet controller is running low on connections IMPORTANT Rack connections are available only to digital 1 0 modules However do not use a rack connection for diagnostic 1 0 modules or fused output modules Diagnostic and fused output data will not be transferred over a rack connection This defeats the purpose of using those modules Publication 1756 UMO058E E
165. T 8 71171717 T1RESI SII WITT XI XI XI SI XI XI XI XII 7MTTSISII IV Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Click OK Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 79 Chapter 4 80 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules ControlLogix diagnostic input modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate on sepatate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual isolation or point to point isolation Other types of isolation available with ControlLogix diagnostic input modules are channel to channel isolation and no isolation Your specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use Multiple Input Point Densities ControlLogix diagnostic input modules use either 8 or 16 point densities for greater flexibility in your application Open Wire Detection Open Wire is used to verify the field wiring is connected to the module The field device must provide a minimum leakage current to function properly A leakage resistor must be placed across the contacts of an input device See each module s specifications listed in Chapter 7 for more details The resulting current is then expected to exist when the input i
166. T 6 O DC6 ControlLogix Backplane Interface DC 7 pie ss 8 OUT 7 n Jumper Bar DC 8 4 hs OUT 8 Display Cut to Length DC 9 4 2 i b OUT 9 DC 10 Qiz 21 OUT40 4 DC 11 QD zg OUT 11 Surge Current Chart Nonisolated Nonisolated Wiring DC 12 l Te ae 25 4 OUrI2 Sourcing Surge DC 13 E28 27 OUT 13 Output 4A g DC 14 C30 29 OUT 14 Wiring DC 15 652 31 OUT 15 DC O mE DC 15 CD 34 33 e Not Used S A Continuous 30 C 86 F Pa Not Used FENIs6 3s OIT Not Used 5 il Dt Continuous 60 C 140 F C p X Additional jumper bars Daisy Chain to Other RTBs may be purchased by E 0 10 ms using catalog number Ti 1756 JMPR ime CQ DCOUTPUT 3 L ST012345676 ST 8 9 10111213 41K Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Technical Specifications 1756 0B16l Attribute 1756 0B161 Outputs 16 individually isolated Voltage category 12 24V DC sink source Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Output delay time OFF to ON 1 ms max ON to OFF 2 ms max Current draw 5 1V 350 mA Current draw 24V 25 mA Power dissipation max 3 6 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 2 28 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max 0 5 mA per point On state voltage drop max 1 2VDC 2A Current per point max 2 A 30 C 86 F 1A 60 C 140 F Current per module max 8 A
167. T 89 0171 WES Voltage category 12 24N DC sink 8 FUSE M Output delay time OFF to ON 75 us nom 1 ms max ELECIPENCALEYEUBHD ON to OFF 360 us nom 1 ms max Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Current draw 5 1V 210 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 OV16E Attribute 1756 0V16E Power dissipation max 6 72 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 22 94 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max 1 mA per poin On state voltage drop max 700 mV DC Q 1A Current per point max 1A 60 C 140 F Current per module max 8A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point AE ms per Point repeatable every 2 s 60 C Load current min 2 mA per poin Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4 IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 0 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for pla
168. UT 10 Output EE LL Device E OUT 11 e IE OUT 10 OUT 13 IEB Co OUT 12 Capacitor ie ia E 0 01 uF Typical OUT 13 OUT 12 OUT 15 ie Ig UT 14 See notes Below e EE 5 0UT 15 0UT 14 De 1 HES ED DC COM 1 CO ED AS Dc S B joc COM 1 CN Simplified Schematic e e lt 5DC V K 7AAC14 A os IS lt our e nd we Eid yit ue e gt T lt l our 6 pc coM Low to True Format 1756 0G16 e 0 0 4V DC Output guaranteed to be in on state e 0 4 4 5V DC Output state not guaranteed e 4 5 5 5V DC Output guaranteed to be in off state Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 221 Chapter 7 Module specific Information CQ DC OUTPUT 3 51012345679 ST 89 10111213 145 L 222 Technical Specifications 1756 0G16 Attribute 1756 0616 Outputs 16 8 points group Voltage category 5V DC TTL LowzTruel Operating voltage range 4 5 5 5V DC source 50 mV P P ripple max Output delay time OFF to ON 45 us nom 450 us max ON to OFF 145 us nom 700 us max Current draw 5 1V 210 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 1 5 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 5 2 BTU hr 60 C 140 F Off state leakage current per point max 0 1 mA per point On state voltage drop max 0 4V DC Current per point max 24 mA 60 C 140 F Current per module max 384
169. ables with free connectors wire into standard terminal blocks or other type of connectors The other end of the cable assembly is an RTB that plugs into the front of the I O module 1 0 Module Pre wired Cable with Free Connectors Terminal Block Most of the I O module ready cables use 0 823 mm 18 AWG conductors for higher current applications or longer cable runs IFM ready cables have a cable connection to attach to the IFM pre wired to one end The other end has free connectors to wire to I O modules ot other components Components IFM ready Cable IFM The IFM ready cables use 0 326 mm 22 AWG wire 288 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G The table lists the IFMs and pre wired cables that can be used with ControlLogix digital I O modules IMPORTANT For the latest list see the Digital Analog Programmable Controller Wiring Systems Technical Data publication 1492 TD008 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 IA8D 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D120 Status indicating Standard with 120V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D 120N Narrow standard with 120V AC status indicators 1492 IFM20D120A 2 120V AC with extra terminals
170. ackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 5 95 noncondensing Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 195 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 0B8 Attribute 1756 0B8 EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0B8 Certification 1756 0B8 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive
171. age 1756 0X8l 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output to output Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire insulation max rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Environmental Specifications 1756 OX8l Attribute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1756 0X8l 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60 Relative humidity 068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing Vibrati IEC 60 on
172. al fuse has detected a 1 bit per point short circuit condition for an output point All FuseBlown conditions are latched and must be reset by the user 0 No fault 1 Fault NoLoad Input data No Load Diagnostic that indicates the absence of a load such as the wire 1 bit per group is disconnected from the module This diagnostic operates only in the Off state 0 No fault 1 Fault OutputVerifyFault Input data Output Verify Diagnostic that indicates that the input has been commanded 1 bit per point 256 to the On state but the output has not been verified to be On 0 No fault 1 Fault output is not On Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Diagnostic Output Module Output Data Tags Tag Definitions Appendix B Name Configuration or I 0 Data Definition CSTTimestamp Output data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp to be used with 8 bytes scheduled outputs and coordinated system time CST Used to synchronize outputs across the system by indicatin the time CST timestamp at which the output module is to apply its outputs Data Output data Off On Status for the output point originating from the controller 1 bit per point Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 0 Off 1 On 257 Appendix B Tag Definitions Notes 258 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Appendix C Introduction Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder L
173. al output module you instruct the owner conttoller when to broadcast the output data to the module If the module resides in the same chassis as the owner controller see illustration below the module receives the data almost immediately after the owner controller sends it backplane transfer times are small 8 8 La Ey 1 9 Data sent at end of Ic every task and at the RPI 6 ay P 9 40949 Depending on the value of the RPI with respect to the length of the program scan the output module can receive and echo data multiple times during one program scan Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Output Modules in a Remote Chassis Local Chassis Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 If an output module physically resides in a chassis other than that of the owner controller that is a remote chassis connected via the ControlNet network the ownet controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate specified Updates are not performed at the end of the controllers tasks In addition the role of the RPI for a remote output module changes slightly with respect to getting data from the owner controller Remote Output Modules Connected Via the ControlNet Network When an RPI value is specified for a
174. all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs turn off during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will turn off Follow these steps to configure the output fault state for a selected module 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 E Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane Enable Diag Latching XII SI SI XI XI XI XI XII SI XI XI XI XI XI XI SI XI XII XI XII v Vv Vv v v v Vv v Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Help 2 Click the pull down menu to choose the fault state Make sure you choose the correct set point where the field device is wired to the module 3 Click OK Output Data Echo During normal operation when a processor sends out an output command to the ControlLogix system the diagnostic output module that is targeted for that command returns the commanded state of the output to the system This process vetifies that the module has received the command and will try to ex
175. ally Explosive Atmosp ant with heres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements II 3 G Ex nA IIC T3 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Divis ion 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certi ied for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 217 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 0C8 Daisy Chain Simplified Schematic DC 0 45V L Aa OUT 0 i i 7 Group 0 Vx n RTN OUT 0 ControlLogix Backplane Interface C 7 Display Surge Current Chart 4A Surge Group 1 5 2A Continuous 60 C 140 F 3 0 10 ms Time Q DCOUTPUT 58101234567 K 6 218 0 Other RTBs DC 0 DC 0 4 RTN OUT Technical Specifications 1756 0C8 4 1 1 1 1 ControlLogix DC 30 60V output module 1756 0C8 OUT Group 0 ln oN lol Tho D z e C a ce a CES ED EB G3 D UT 4 OUT 5 Group 1 Ce ee CES ED EIE E EI D 3 D RTN OUT 1
176. an Immediate Output OT instruction if programmed is executed An IOT sends data immediately and resets the RPI timer 34 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Listen only Mode Multiple Owners of Input Modules Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Any controller in the system can listen to the data from any I O module for example input data echoed output data or echoed diagnostic information This even applies if the controller does not own the module that is it does not have to hold the module s configuration data to listen to the module During the I O configuration process you can specify one of several Listen modes in the Comm Format pull down menu For more information see Communication Format in Chapter 6 Choosing a Listen mode option allows the controller and module to establish communication without the controller sending any configuration data In this instance another controller owns the module being listened to IMPORTANT In the Listen only mode controllers will continue to receive data multicast from the I O module as long as the connection between the owner controller and 1 0 module is maintained If the connection between the owner controller and module is broken the module stops multicasting data and connections to all Listening controllers are also broken Because Listening controllers lose their connections to modules when communic
177. anges state This helps to reduce the worst case time Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 When selecting values for the remotely located module s RPI system Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 throughput is optimized when its RPI value is a powet of two times the current NUT running on the ControlNet network For example the following table shows recommended RPI values for a system by using a NUT of 5 ms Recommended RPI Values for System by Using NUT of 5 ms NUT 5 ms y20 x2 x23 x24 x2 Optimal RPI 5 ms Values ms 20 ms 40 ms 80 ms 160 ms 320 ms 640 ms Remote Input Modules Connected Via the EtherNet IP Network When remote digital input modules are connected to the owner controller via an EtherNet IP network data is transferred to the owner controller in the following way at the RPI the module produces data within its own chassis at the COS if enabled the 1756 Ethernet bridge module in the remote chassis immediately sends the module s data over the network to the owner controller as long as it has not sent data within a timeframe that is one quarter the value of the digital input module s RPI This prevents flooding the network with data For example if a digital input module uses an RPI 100 ms the Ethernet module sends module data immediately on receiving it if another data packet was not sent wi
178. arious modules Some of these features include data transfer on either Change of State or Cyclic Time output data echo fusing field power loss detection and diagnostic latch of information The latter two options are available only on the 1756 OA8E module Topic Pae Input Module Compatibility 40 Output Module Compatibility 41 Features on ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Modules 42 Features Specific to Standard Input Modules 56 Features Specific to Standard Output Modules 60 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers 66 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controllers 67 Before proceeding we suggest you take a few minutes to review a list of standard digital I O modules Cat No Description 1756 IA16 74 132V AC 16 point input module 1756 IA161 79 132V AC 16 point isolated input module 1756 IA32 74 132V AC 32 point input module 1756 IB16 10 31 2V DC 16 point input module 1756 IB16l 10 30V DC 16 point isolated input module 1756 IB32 10 31 2V DC 32 point input module 1756 IC16 30 60V DC 16 point input module 1756 1G16 Transitor transitor logic TTL input module 1756 IH161 90 146V DC 16 point isolated input module 1756 IM161l 159 265V AC 16 point isolated input module 1756 IN16 10 30V AC 16 point input module 1756 IV16 10 30V DC 16 point sourcing current input module 1756 IV32 10 30V DC 32 point s
179. as aeae otc epe e Ro en 122 Configure a Standard Input Module 000 124 Configure a Standard Output Module 000004 125 Configure a Diagnostic Input Module 0000004 126 Configure a Diagnostic Output Module 000 126 Edt ONMOULAMON ERN CC 127 Configure I O Modules in a Remote Chassis 00 128 Inp ut Online Service Cua ose guts ratore sat y DE SR es E dta 129 Output Online Services sins dowd ves 66 Pot ruPREDV EURO POS Ped 129 View and Change Module Tags ere Rn 129 Chapter 7 T troductioOH descr ihe tree uS E EEE PIN 131 1756 LX91D oras d ertt e S eC AEN SUN 134 TU5OSENT6 23 mister sonet ed ade Pe ot ee Ma ifs 137 T756 DNXTOE tv esos te venda ea a vem qus ro ets 140 T1956 LN325 2c VEA rU ER pe Rd eb kW ee ae ue 143 1 756 IB 10 9569 Chrono nu ten tuto evt unie tates deis rs et 146 1750 IB16 D re S eicere terere CE ERE Mae webs eid 149 D2563IB TOL 22 treten Gate tee Nt ede S ace cedes es 152 1375635IB32 tee E MEER SU a ahah nce ee tas 155 TIb6SIG 16 2 omoi estes ena tb m eel aee et t 158 TPS O21G 6 5 pes ait eren e etu s ou ete sls LN a us 161 1756 1EL TOT o faecal eae ARA Oe Eb Ghent SR 164 LPS 6 IMITOT is yw pese Er eR NORD I UP 167 TD56 INTO se ein tats EE E E x E sal ote 170 OSA MIO PMIECPIDR UP ance aks 173 17 562 01N2327 Me sche dre CERE E SERO POE Dee UE Ret DTE 176 T3 56 O NBI eom ao at e Go dad eee RE de 179 T2560 CASI abso a a e e Sine lei
180. ata to the owner controller Topic Description Requested packet interval A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer Change of state Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On The data will be sent at the RPI rate when there is no change of state By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Set RPI The Connection tab on the Module Properties dialog box lets you enter a requested packet interval RPI The RPI guarantees the slowest rate at which data is multicast to the owner controller The module s actual data transfer rate may be faster than the RPI setting But the RPI provides a defined maximum period of time when data is transferred to the owner controller Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Module Properties Local 1 1756 1416 3 1 Chapter 3 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI po 02 ms 0 2 750 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Status Offline Field Requested Packet Interval RPI Cancel
181. ate 56 Software Configurable Filter Times 59 Standard digital Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Input Modules 59 input modules Multiple Input Point Densities 59 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States 60 Output Data Echo 61 Standard digital Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Output Modules 62 output modules Multiple Output Point Densities 62 Electronic Fusing 62 1756 OA8E 1756 OB16E 1756 OB8EI 1756 OV16E 1756 0V32E Field Power Loss Detection 65 1756 OA8E Diagnostic Latch of Information 65 1756 OA8E Time scheduled Output Control 53 1756 OB16IS 42 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features Chapter 3 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All ControlLogix I O modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process This helps prevent an entire production line from having to be shut down Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s fault status indicator and the RSLogix 5000 programming software will graphically display this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the f
182. ation with the owner controller stop the ControlLogix system lets you define more than one ownet controller for input modules IMPORTANT Only input modules can have multiple owners If multiple owners are connected to the same input module they must maintain identical configuration for that module In the illustration Controller A and Controller B both have been configured to be the owner controller of the same input module Initial Configuration Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX XXXXX XXXXX Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 IRA gt A 9 Input e B 4 Initial Configuration i E Y m Input Module 9 Configuration Data 9 A B XXXXX o XXXXX e XXXXX mi 41056 35 Chapter 2 Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Multiple Owners 36 Initial Configuration Input Module Configuration Data XXXXX Zzzzz XXXXX As soon as a controller receives its user program it will try to establish a connection with the input module Whichever controller s configuration data arrives first shown as A and B in the illustration establishes a connection When the second controller s data arrives the module compares it to its current configura
183. ature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 1 The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V ms for loads under 50 mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500 mA OUTPUT to L2 is 4V ms maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50 mA range a resistor may be added AC ross the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50 mA I V R At 50 mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for the output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500 mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at ault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void of any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections 7 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 3 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 0A16 Attribute 1756 0A16 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 T
184. ault This feature lets you determine how your module has been affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation Software Configurable RSLogix 5000 programming software uses a custom easily understood interface to write configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You can also use the software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve setial number firmwate tevision information product code vendor error fault information diagnostic counters By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and mote reliable Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 43 Chapter 3 44 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Electronic Keying The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module as shown in the RSLogix 5000 I O Configuration tree to the physical module before I O communication begins You can use electronic keying to help prevent communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected For each module in the I O Configuration tree the user selected keying option determines if and how an electronic keying check is performed Typically three keying options are available Exact Match Compatible Keying Disable Keying You must carefully consider the benefits and implications
185. based on a thermal cutout principal In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milliseconds after its thermal cutout temperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on the output ve channels that are affected by this phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and rese to GND as a possible cause Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 The output cannot turn On due to hardware point damage Depending on the characteristics of an applied short circuit an outpu if a short circuit on one channel occurs It is not possible to create a fuse blown fault in the Off state If a short circuit occurs the point is turned Off and When the pulse test is executed it is normal operation to see a momentary pulsation on the module display ify fault signal due to the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V DC The output master CPU bridge and so forth What this means is that the output verify fault could be set until the short circuit is detected by the module and the output is turned Off the fault appears in the Off state until that point is reset During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to GND may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted 71 Chapter 4 ControlLogix D
186. ber Status Module s status that shows the following information Controller ownership if any Whether module has been configured Device Specific Status such as e Self Test e Hash update in progress Communications fault Not owned outputs in Program mode Internal fault need flash update e Run mode Program mode output mods only Minor recoverable fault Minor unrecoverable fault Major recoverable fault Major unrecoverable fault Vendor Module manufacturer vendor for example Allen Bradley Serial number Module serial number Length of ASCII text string Number of characters in module s text string ASCII text string Module s ASCII text string description IMPORTANT You must perform a WHO service to retrieve this information See page 275 for procedures on retrieving module identification information 17 Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Notes 18 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter 2 Introduction Ownership Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System I O modules ate the interface between the controller and the field devices that comprise the ControlLogix system Digital I O modules transfer data to devices that require just one bit to be represented 0 or 1 For example a switch is open or closed or a light is on or off Topic
187. ble Keying Compatible Keying Disable Keying n Exact Match IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data Exact Match Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes that is Vendor Product Type Product Code catalog number Major Revision and Minor Revision of the physical module and the module created in the software to match precisely to establish communication If any attribute does not match precisely I O communication is not permitted with the module or with modules connected through it as in the case of a communication module Use Exact Match keying when you need the system to verify that the module revisions in use ate exactly as specified in the project such as for use in highly regulated industries Exact Match keying is also necessary to enable Automatic Firmware Update for the module via the Firmware Supervisor feature from a Logix5000 controller Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 45 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features EXAMPLE In the following scenario Exact Match keying prevents I 0 communication e The module configuration is for a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 1 The physical module is a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 2 In this case communication is prevented because the Minor Revision of the module does not match precisely
188. can replace a module of a certain Major Revision with one of the same catalog number and the same or later that is higher Major Revision In some cases the selection makes it possible to use a replacement that is a different catalog number than the original For example you can replace a 1756 CNBR module with a 1756 CN2R module Release notes for individual modules indicate the specific compatibility details When a module is created the module developers consider the module s development history to implement capabilities that emulate those of the previous module However the developers cannot know future developments Because of this when a system is configured we recommend that you configure your module by using the earliest that is lowest revision of the physical module that you believe will be used in the system By doing this you can avoid the case of a physical module rejecting the keying request because it is an eatlier revision than the one configured in the software EXAMPLE In the following scenario Compatible Keying prevents 1 0 communication e The module configuration is for a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 3 The physical module is a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 2 In this case communication is prevented because the minor revision of the module is lower than expected and may not be compatible with 3 3 Module Configuration 17564816D 16 Point 10V 30V DC Diagnostic Input Vendor A
189. catalog n 010 1 0 m 25 2 5 m 050 5 m Build to order cable lengths are also available 2 Four conductors are not connected to the RTB 302 1756 TBCH mber in place of the x 005 0 5 m Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Glossary broadcast Data transmissions to all addresses or functions change of state COS Any change in the ON or OFF state of a point on an I O module communication format Format that defines the type of information transferred between an I O module and its owner controller This format also defines the tags created for each I O module compatible match An electronic keying protection mode that requires that the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor and catalog number In this case the minor revision of the module must be greater than or equal to that of the configured slot connection The communication mechanism from the controller to another module in the control system coordinated system time CST Timer value which is kept synchronized for all modules within a single ControlBus chassis direct connection An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules disable keying An electronic keying protection mode that requires no attributes of the physical module and the module configured in the software to match download The process of transferring the contents of a project o
190. cated in the following table Condition Communications fault Set Bits All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Fuse blown Field power loss Only the bit affected is set to 1 The following illustration offers an overview of the fault reporting process on ControlLogix digital output modules Bit 31 Bit 0 A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A fuse blown or field power loss condition in the module fault word sets the appropriate bit Group 1 Group 0 A blown fuse for any point group sets the bit for that point group in the fuse blown word and also sets appropriate bit bits in the module fault word he Group 0 41457 A loss of that poin ield power from any group sets he bit for in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bits in the module fault word Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter Introduction Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features This chapter describes devices compatible with ControlLogi
191. ccurred for a standard output module Tag Description Module fault word This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules Fuse blown word This word indicates a point group fuse blown on the module Its tag name is FuseBlown This word is available only on 1756 0A16 1756 OA8E 1756 OB16E 1756 OB8EI 1756 OV16E and 1756 OV32E modules See Electronic Fusing for more information Field power loss word This word indicates a loss of field power to a point on the module It s tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is available on 1756 OA8E module See Field Power Loss Detection for more information All words ate 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate for each module s density are used For example the 1756 OB8 module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a eight point module only the first eight bits bits 0 7 are used in the module fault wotd 67 Chapter 3 68 Module fault Word All modules Fuse Blown Word Point Level Group Level 1756 OA8E 1756 0A16 1756 OB8EI 1756 OB16E 1756 OV16E 1756 0V32E Field Power Loss Word 1756 OA8E only ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Fault bits in the fuse blown word and field power loss word are logically entered into the module fault word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault word can mean multiple things as indi
192. ch point on the module that you want to produce data whenever a Off gt On change of state such as Off On On Off is detected On gt Off Clear the box to disable the feature for each point See Change of State COS in Chapter 2 for more information 122 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Field Name Enable Diagnostics for Open Wire Chapter 6 Description This option is available only for diagnostic modules Check a point to enable open wire detection Clear the box to disable the feature for each point See Open Wire Detection in Chapter 4 for more information Enable diagnostic latching This option is available only for diagnostic modules Check a point to enable diagnostic latching Clear the box to disable the feature for each point See Diagnostic Latch of Information in Chapter 4 for more information Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Check the box lower portion of the screen to transmit diagnostic status data with an updated timestamp when a change of state occurs Input filter time 2 Do one of the following Click the pull down to choose how long a signal must be present before it is detected on a channel wide basis The first column enables points when power is turned Off to On and the second column is for points when power is turned On to Off
193. cho may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the Output Data Echo check your output module for the following conditions Communications fault Connection is inhibited e Blown fuse Module will not turn on output if overload short circuit is detected e Loss of field power 1756 OA8D and 1756 OA8E only Module will not turn On output if no AC power is detected 61 Chapter 3 62 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Output Modules As with input modules ControlLogix output modules provide isolated or non isolated wiring options I O modules provide point to point group to gtoup or channel to channel wiring isolation Your specific application will determine what type of isolation is necessary and which output module to use IMPORTANT Although some ControlLogix I O modules provide non isolated field side wiring options each I O module maintains internal electrical isolation between the system side and field side Multiple Output Point Densities ControlLogix output modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application A point is the termination where a wire attaches to the I O module from a device The I O gets information from the device to this designated point thus signaling when activity occurs Electronic Fusing Some digital outp
194. cific Information 1756 1V32 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sourcing input module Simplified Schematic 1756 132 DC 0 V r IN 1 2 14K NO LN NL S N 3 gla 3 e N2 0O t J N5 E e s N4 P4 NAE C J AA N ain K Group 0 N 7 qe 7 N 6 Group 0 a 1 N 9 l1 98 N 8 IN 0 J T i a a l ASA GND M1 Tey 2 ng N 10 b A Daisy 5 N 13 Qu so N 12 ControlLogix Display Chain to En Pray Other N15 TED 16 asg N 14 inter RTBs DC 0 18 17E DC 0 merrace m IN 17 amp 20 196 N 16 N 19 a IQ 22 a9 N 18 Lo lt 1 Jumper N 21 ga zg N 20 Wire amp N23 HE 26 25 N 22 N 25 7G 28 z7 N 24 Group 1 N27 G 30 29 N 26 Group 1 N 29 o 2 31 4 N 28 N 31 El a 33 4 N 30 DC 1 EN 36 35 DC 1 E ij T DC COM Technical Specifications 1756 1V32 N amp DCINPUT Attribute 1756 1732 ST 01234567 3 Inputs 32 16 points group 111111 ST89 91412345 k Voltage category 12 24V DC source 11112222 3 ST67890123 Operating voltage range 10 30V DC gt 22222233 45678901 Input voltage nom 24V DC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 350 us nom 1 ms ma
195. ckaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Oscillatory surge withstand IEEE C37 90 1 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 3kV 237 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Certifications 1756 OW16l Certification 1756 OW161 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File 65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Re
196. communications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 169 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 IN16 ControlLogix AC 10 30V input module Simplified Schematic pe NAR 5V IN O i Co ia ee 4 lt M E 1 os LEEREN De E T I KD KD ControlLogix Display Id Ig Backplane 7 L2 0 1 J Interface ICD CO KD ED N 11 H 4 kB D tee ws DIED 9 a BI Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 IN16 4 AC INPUT Attribute 1756 IN16 8 Inputs 16 8 points group 581012345670 Voltage category 24V AC ST 89 10111213 1415K Operating voltage range 10 30V AC 6 47 63 Hz Input voltage nom 24V AC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 10 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 10 ms
197. compliant with 326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements 000 6 2 Industrial Immunity 000 6 4 Industrial Emissions 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN6 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick AS NZS C Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with SPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European EN60 EN60 Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with 079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n 079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T5 X 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 163 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 1H161 ControlLogix DC 90 146V isolated input module 1756 1H161 Simplified Schematic V DC 0 GND 0 216 IN 0 o o o DCO 5V Isolated GND 1 aya 3 e ina IN 0 j Wiring GND 2 ale 5 5 N 2 DC 3 o GND 3 ae 7 ED Ins o o o 00344 GND 0 ES YE GND4 TEjo 9 EDI ma A 4 LLL GND 5 Eh 11 CD N 5 _ PS t GND 6 TED n 13 DTI ING GND i j t DC 7 o GND 7 Bie so n7 oo oD Jumper Bar GND 8 cp 18 17 CD N 8 ControlLogix Display Cut to Length GND 9 f 20 19 N 9 p Backplane GND 10 g
198. ction 24 tip on conserving bandwidth 28 D data exchange producer consumer model 13 27 32 73 data transmissions diagnostic change of state 78 RPI 27 93 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Index diagnostic Change of State 78 latching 65 74 digital 1 0 13 See also module direct connection 24 dynamic reconfiguration 127 E electronic keying 44 72 119 extended depth housing using 105 F fault reporting diagnostic input modules 93 modules 71 76 output modules 82 95 standard input modules 66 modules 43 output modules 67 fault type 248 features digital I O modules 132 field power loss detection 1756 IA8D module 81 1756 OA8E module 65 field power loss word diagnostic input modules 94 output modules 96 standard output modules 68 fuse blown word diagnostic output modules 96 standard output modules 68 fusing diagnostic output modules 85 91 nondiagnostic output modules 62 H housing choosing extended depth housing 105 307 Index 308 1 0 See module input online services 129 installing an 1 0 Module 97 interface module IFM 14 internal module operations 21 K keying electronic 44 72 mechanical 16 Removable Terminal Block RTB 99 L latching diagnostic 65 74 Listen only connections 35 rack optimization 24 local chassis input modules 27 output modules 32 locking tab 16 loss of field power 61 84 detection diagnostic output modules 92 major revision 113
199. ctronic fusing to protect output points from the surge of too much current through that point on the module If too much current begins to flow through a point the fuse is tripped and a point level fault is sent to the controller You can reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 programming software ot through ladder logic running on a controller See page 273 in Appendix C for performing a fuse reset with a CIP Genetic Message instruction This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see page 249 Follow these steps to reset a fuse for a point on a module 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Diagnostics tab imi Module Properties Local 4 1756 0B16D 2 1 x j Pulse Test Backplane General Connection Module Info Configuration Reset Electronic E Y RUE Diagnostics Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Status Running Cancel EDHI Help 2 Click Reset for a particular point on the module to reset a fuse 3 Click OK Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 91 Chapter 4 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features 92 Field power Loss Detection on Output Modules This feature 1s used when field power to the output module is lost ot zeto ctoss cannot be detected A point level fault is sent to the controller t
200. d RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 OA8E Certification 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 1756 OA8E UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification li
201. d or Minor revision invalid or incorrect Status Faulted Cancel Help 248 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Appendix B Tag Definitions Introduction This appendix describes the tags that are used for standard and diagnostic input and output modules Module defined data types and tags are created when a module is initiated The set of tags associated with any module depends on the type of module and the communication format chosen during configuration Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags ControlLogix standard and diagnostic input modules have two types of tags Configuration structure of data sent from the controller to the I O module upon powerup Input structute of data continually sent from the I O module to the controller containing the current operational status of the module The table lists all possible standard input module tags In each application the series of tags varies depending on how the module is configured Standard Input Module Configuration Tags Name Configuration or 1 0 Data COSOnOffEn Configuration 1bit per point Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 Definition Change of State On to Off Causes updated data to be sent to the Controller immediately after an input for an On to Off transition of the masked input points The CST timestamp also is updated May be used to trigger an Event Task in the Controller 0 Disable
202. d the RSLogix 5000 programming software will graphically display this fault and include a fault message describing the nature of the fault This feature lets you determine how your module has been affected and what action should be taken to resume normal operation Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 71 Chapter 4 72 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Software Configurable The RSLogix 5000 programming software uses a custom easily understood interface to write configuration All module features are enabled or disabled through the I O configuration portion of the software You also can use the software to interrogate any module in the system to retrieve serial number firmware revision information product code vendor error fault information diagnostic countets By eliminating such tasks as setting hardware switches and jumpers the software makes module configuration easier and more reliable Electronic Keying See Hlectronic Keying on page 44 for details Module Inhibiting See Module Inhibiting on page 51 for details Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs and Schedule Outputs Controllers generate a 64 bit coordinated system time CST for their respective chassis The CST is a chassis specific time that is not synchronized with or in any way connected to the time generated over the ControlNet network to establish a network update time NUT as described in Use
203. d through Standard 1492 CABLEXU x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IMF20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC 1492 CABLEXW x cable length status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM20F FS 2 Fusible Isolated 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals per output and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1756 OB8EI 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Fusible Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 1756 OB8l N A Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 295 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 0B16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F F24D 2 Fusible Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage status indicator circuit with four iso
204. ddress for the message An analog input can have multiple alarms so this attribute acknowledges a specific alarm and not the other alarms If an attribute is not specified default to 0 the Service applies to all attributes of the Class Instance Object Attribute Attribute Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 265 Appendix C Module Services and Configuration Information Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Versions 9 and Earlier Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration The following table contains code information that is necessary only if you are configuring the message with RSLogix 5000 software versions 9 or earlier Retrieve CST Retrieve Device Reset the Reset Latched Reset Electronic Pulse Test Information Information Module Diagnostics Fuse WHO Service Code 1 1 5 4b 4d Ac Object Type 7 1 1 1d Input le le modules 1e Output modules Object ID 1 1 1 1 1 1 Object Attribute N A N A N A N A N A N A Source N A N A N A Enable 32 Points Enable 32 Points Pulse Test Para DINT DINT meters SINT 10 Number of 0 0 0 4 4 10 Elements bytes Destination CST Information WHO Information N A N A Results 32 Points N A SINT 20 SINT 48 DINT Modules AII AII All 1756 OA8D 1756 OA8D 1756 OA8D 1756 OB16D 1756 0B16D 1756 0B16D 1756 OA8E 1756 IA8D 1756 IB16D 266 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform R
205. duct Name Allen Bradley Specialty 1 0 1756 HSC 1 6 80206D0C 1756 HSC A Ver 1 6 r Status Major Fault Minor Fault Internal State Configured Owned Module Identity Timer Hardware Timer Sync ed Coordinated System Time CST Ok No Refresh Reset Module Status Waiting Cancel Help On the Module Info tab in the Status section the Major and Minor Faults are listed along with the Internal State of the module Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 247 AppendixA Troubleshoot Your Module Notification in Tag Editor Scope fd myhse v Show ShouAl ABATE HSCCO ABATE HSCLO Decimal s Decimal loc h Decimal E locat SW Decimal Local SW Decinal Local Ne Decimal The Value field shows 65535 to indicate the module connection has been broken Fault Type Determination When you are monitoring a module s configuration properties in RSLogix 5000 softwate and receive a Communication fault message the Connection tab lists the type of fault under Module Fault E Module Properties Local 8 1756 0B16D 3 1 General Connection Module Into Configuration Diagnostics Pulse Test Backplane Requested Packet Interval RPI poo ms 0 2 750 0 ms Inhibit Module Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While in Run Mode Module Fault Code 1680118 Electronic Keying Mismatch Major an
206. e aa eme Jumper Bar Cut to Length Lt D s D OUTS NO OUT 0 N O L1 4 Q 18 7 9 OUT 4 N C Display L1 4 E 20 19 4 OUT 4 N 0 L1 5 GQ 22 nq OUT 5 N C ps L1 5 Tey 24 sep OUT 5N 0 e m Nonisolated L1 6 A 2e 2 4 OUT 6 N C e Additional jumper bars may be purchased Wiring L6 165 28 2 OUT N O 4 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR 1 7 Ten 30 29 S OUT 7 N C L1 7 E 32 31 OUT 7 N O L1 o L1 7 l a 33 6D Not Used T Not Used 236 asig Not Used Oo N 1 L2 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 OX8I Attribute 1756 0X8l RELAY OUTPUT Outputs 8 N 0 3 8 N C individually isolated 2 points group STON a m UL module rating UL C300 R150 K Operating voltage range 5 125V DC 8 10 240V AC 47 63 Hz Contact current rating 2A 5 30V DC 0 5 A 48V DC 0 25 A Q 125V DC 2 A Q 125 240V AC Output delay time OFF to ON 3 ms max ON to OFF 3 ms max Current draw 5 1V 00 mA Current draw 24V 00 mA Power dissipation max 3 1 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 0 57 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max 0 mA Initial contact resistance max 00 m 6V 1A Switching frequency max operation 3 s 0 3 Hz at rated load Bounce time mean 2ms Expected contact life 300 K cycles resistive 00 K cycles inductive Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 239 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 OX8l Attribute Isolation volt
207. e Isolation voltage Module specific Information 1756 0H8l 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output to output Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Chapter 7 Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style 0 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 7 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 OH8l Attribute 1756 OH8I Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Non
208. e 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 4 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 100 mA Current draw Q 24V 3mA Power dissipation max 5W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 17 05 BTU hr Off state voltage max 5V Off state current max 1 5 mA On state current min 2mA Q 10 V DC On state current max 10 mA 30V DC Inrush current max 250 mA peak decaying to 3796 in 22 ms without activation 152 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 IB161 Attribute 1756 IB16l Input impedance max 3 kQ 30V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input to input Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4 IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publicati
209. e only one CST value is returned to the controller when any input point changes state it is recommended that you use timestamping on only one input point per module The following table describes how you can use the system clock Use of Timestamping Topic Description Timestamping for The CST can be used to establish a sequence of events occurring at a a sequence of particular input module point by timestamping the input data To events determine a sequence of events you must do the following e Set the input module s communication format to CST Timestamped Input Data Enable Change of state for the input point where a sequence will occur Disable COS for all other points on the module If you decide to configure multiple input points for COS your module generates a unique CST each time any of those input points change state as long as the changes do not occur within 500 us of each other If multiple input points configured for COS change state within 500 us of each other a single CST value is generated for all making it appear that they changed at exactly the same time Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 Use of Timestamping Topic Description Timestamping in Timestamping can be used in conjunction with the scheduled outputs conjunction with feature so that after input data changes sta
210. ection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 220 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0616 ControlLogix TTL output module Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring 1756 0G16 1756 0G16 sg a DC Power Wire Es 5V DC gt A T pL out B GB our 0 e a e 0UT 1 S7 IE louro Il I r IT svi D n TED ED o2 D 4 out 3 G G lour2 e 5 1 outs ep OUT 4 D OUT 5 e ie OUT 4 e L wr e IE jours 1 BI E d PEUT gt ja Wire ourz ES E jours DC e Deo EB I DC COM 0 n IE RO DC como U U UT ie i OUT 8 m L JN i zx TL H A ours IGS E jours our1t IEE O
211. ecute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal through a listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the ownet controller This feature cannot relay to the system that the field side device connected to the output module has executed the command Refer to Field side Output Verification on page 87 if your application requires a more detailed response than only acknowledging the receipt of a command Monitor Fault Bits The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is an anomaly with the module the commanded state and the Output Data Echo may not match 83 Chapter 4 84 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions If a fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data echo may not match the commanded state of the outputs If there is a mismatch between the commanded state of the outputs and the Output Data Echo check your diagnostic output module for the following conditions Communications fault Connection inhibited e Blown fuse Module will not turn on output if overload short circuit is detected Loss of field power 1756 OA8D and 1756 OA8E only Module will not turn on output if no AC power is detected Field Wiring
212. ent rating the no load diagnostic function of the 1756 OB16D module will not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a no load condition If you require this diagnostic to function for a blown or removed fuse you must use a 1492 IFM40F F24D 2 module Do not use this module in Output Sinking mode with fused IFM modules as the IFM module fuses will not properly protect the circuit 301 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules The following tables describe the I O module ready pre wired cables available for use with your ControlLogix digital I O modules Cat No No of Conductors 1492 CABLEXU 20 1492 CABLExV 1492 CABLEXW 1492 CABLExX 1492 CABLExY 40 1492 CABLExZ Cables are available in lengths of 0 5 m 1 0 m 2 5 m and 5 0 m 1 Conductor Size Nominal Outer RTB at the 1 0 Diameter Module End 11 7 mm 0 46 in 1756 TBCH o order insert the code for the desired cable length into the catalog n 010 1 0 m 025 2 5 m 050 5 m Build to order cable lengths are also available No of Conductors Conductor Size Nominal Outer Diameter Cat No 1492 CABLExTBNH 20 0 823 mm 18 AWG 11 4 mm 0 45 in 1492 CABLExTBCH Cables are available in lengths of 0 5 m 1 0 m 2 5 m and 5 0 m 1 40 mber in place of the x 005 0 5 m RTB at the 1 0 Module End 1756 TBNH 14 1 mm 0 55 in To order insert the code for the desired cable length into the
213. er configurable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms In the worst case scenario with a filter time of 0 ms the 1756 IB16 module has a 490 us signal propagation delay These times are not guaranteed We list nominal and maximum delay times for each module in Chapter 7 ControlLogix output modules receive a signal from the controller and process it internally that is ASIC delay and hardware delay before sending a signal to the output device via the RTB Signal Received from Controller ASIC Delay fo Hardware Delay AN ner ut P1 Signal Sent from RTB Output Point Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal propagation on a module Delay Description ASIC ASIC scan 200 ys typical Hardware How the module is configured and the variance between the type of modules affects how the signal is processed A typical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors EXAMPLE that may contribute For example if you are turning on a 1756 OB16E module at 24V DC in 25 C 77 F conditions the signal propagation delay is affected by hardware delay to energize the output typically 70 us on this module e ASIC scan 200 us In the worst case scenario the 1756 0B16E module has a 270 us signal propagation delay These times are not guaranteed We list nom
214. erating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 228 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0N8 Attribute 1756 0N8 Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions SPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 C 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity IEC 6100
215. erminals per output 1492 IMF40F FS240 4 Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 300 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1 0 Cat No 1756 0X8l 9 The 1492 IFM4 diagnostic to f Expandable to Can have up to 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 IFM40DS24 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24 48V AC DC 1492 IFM40DS1 20 4 status indicators and four terminals per output Isolated with 120V AC status indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 2 1492 IFMADF FS24 2 1492 IMFA0F FS24 4 1492 IFMAOF FS 4 1492 IMF40F FS120 2 1492 IMF40F FS120 4 5 IFMs status ind 1492 IMF40F FS240 4 1 This IFM is not recommended for use with 1 0 modules that have an off s for inputs Use a 1492 IFM20D120 2 module for outputs 6 by using a XIM120 BR or XIMF 24 2 module 1 expandable module depending upon master used total icator provides output On Off indication Due to the magni will not work If this function is required use the 1492 IFM40F 2 module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Fusible Expandable to 16 by using a XIM24 8R or XIMF 24 2 module Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs Isolated with extra te
216. ers for Digital I O Modules Notes 284 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Appendix F Introduction Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Major Revision Upgrades ControlLogix 1756 digital I O modules are transitioning to use a new internal backplane Application Specific Integrated Circuits ASIC chip As a result the module s Major Revision number has also been upgraded Digital I O modules with the new ASIC are identified at Major Revision 3 x IMPORTANT Do not backflash your module s firmware from firmware revision 3 x to 2 x Attempting to backflash or downgrade a module s firmware from 3 x to 2 x will irreversibly damage the module You must return modules damaged by an attempt to backflash to firmware 2 x to Rockwell Automation Modules with the new internal backplane ASIC are form fit functional equivalents to the 2 x modules You can use Major Revision 3 x modules as direct replacements for Major Revision 2 x modules if the electronic keying of the module is specified as Compatible or Disabled Keying the electronic keying of the module is Exact Keying then additional steps ate required See page 286 for details The use of the upgraded ASIC also impacts the firmware revisions that can be flash upgraded to the module Digital I O modules at Major Revision 3 x cannot be backflashed to any 2 x firmware revision Digital I O modules at firmware revision 2 x cannot be flash upgraded to an
217. es 80 Diagnostic digital input Multiple Input Point Densities 80 modules Open Wire Detection 80 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 78 Field power Loss Detection on Input Modules 81 1756 IA8D Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Topic Page Available Modules Configurable Point level Output Fault States 82 Output Data Echo 83 Field Wiring Options 84 Multiple Input Point Densities 80 Electronic Fusing 85 No Load Detection 86 d digital output Field side Output Verification 87 Pulse Test 89 Point level Electronic Fusing 91 Field power Loss Detection on Output Modules 92 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules 93 Features Common to The features described in this section are available on all ControlLogix ControlLogix Diagnostic diagnostic digital I O modules Digital 1 0 Modules Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP All ControlLogix I O diagnostic modules may be inserted and removed from the chassis while power is applied This feature allows greater availability of the overall control system because while the module is being removed or inserted there is no additional disruption to the rest of the controlled process Module Fault Reporting ControlLogix diagnostic digital I O modules provide both hardware and software indication when a module fault has occurred Each module s fault status indicator an
218. est Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 189 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 0A16 Attribute Temperature storage IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 1756 0A16 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges IEC 61000 4 3 Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient IEC 61000 4 5 immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 6 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IE
219. etween the owner controller and digital I O in the remote chassis Rather than having several direct connections with individual RPI values the owner controller has a single rack connection with a single RPI value That RPI value accommodates all digital I O modules in the rack connection IMPORTANT Because rack connections are applicable only in applications that use a remote chassis you must configure the Communication Format for both the remote 1 0 module and the remote 1756 CNB module or Ethernet module Make sure you configure both modules for Rack Optimization If you choose a different Communication Format for each the controller makes two connections to the same chassis one for each format and the same data travels across the ControlNet network If you use Rack Optimization for both modules you preserve bandwidth and configure your system to operate more efficiently The input or data echo information is limited to general faults and data No additional status for example diagnostic is available IMPORTANT Each controller can establish connections in any combination of direct or rack In other words you can use a rack connection between an owner controller and multiple remote 1 0 modules while simultaneously using a direct connection between that same controller and any other I O modules in the same remote chassis Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 25 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix
220. f Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 199 Chapter 7 200 Module specific Information 1756 0B8l ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated output module 45y Simplified Schematic 1796 0BI 4 DC 0 Tu M mM L CL 060 7 T Ig ouro LL Isolated RINOUTO 2 3 E OUT 0 L amio OUT 0 Wiring DC g 6 5 le OUT 1 gt RTN OUT 1 e7 fr OUT1 JY as l pe2 109 5 QUT2 A OUT 0 RTN OUT 2 7 mg OUT 2 v i gt DC 3 M 135 OUT 3 Display Outpu RTN RTN OUT 3 ate 5 LT OUT3 r E i 18 17 T ControlLogix Backplane Device OUT 0 u E a 4 E 20 48 E m Interface 4 DCS 22 n t OUT 5 e TI RTN OUT 5 6D 23 D OUT 5 saints DC 6 CD pe 75 CD OUT 6 4 Surge Current Chart mnl A Roure Hebi 2 ET ours Surae Nonisolated CPB 4 gt 0 7 CD ao 29 QUT _ 4A g Wiring 71 RIN OUT 7 HeD 2 31 OUT 7 Daisy Not Used Da 33 D Not Used Chaint Not Used ICD se 35 ED Not Used er T I 2 s C 2A Continuous 60 C 140 F on aiiis hn c 0 10 ms Time Technical Specifications 1756 OB8l gt __ DC OUTPUT Attribute 1756 OB8l 3 Outputs 8 individually isolated ST 01234567 0 K Voltage category 12 24V DC source 6 Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Output delay time OFF to ON 1 ms max ON to OFF 2
221. fault For more information on these tags see Appendix B If an output cannot be verified a point level fault is sent to the controller 87 Chapter4 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Follow these steps to enable the field side output verification 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab lll Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 Enable Diag Latching al Vv M M r r r r r lalala la lalala XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI XI If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Communications Failure Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the Output Verify column Click the box to enable the feature for a specific point Clear the check matk to disable the feature for specific point 3 Click OK 88 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Pulse Test Pulse test is a feature found on diagnostic output modules that can verify output circuit functionality without actually changing the state of the output load device A short pulse is sent to the targeted output circuit The circuit should respond as it would if a real change of state command was issued but the load device does not transition See page 273 in Appendix C for performing a pulse test with a CIP Generic Me
222. ff Clear the check mark to disable the COS for a specific point 3 Click OK 58 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 Software Configurable Filter Times On to Off and Off to On filter times can be adjusted through RSLogix 5000 programming software for all ControlLogix input modules These filters improve noise immunity within a signal A larger filter value affects the length of delay times for signals from these modules Follow these steps to configure the input filter time 1 On the right side of the Configuration tab click the pull down menu to choose the input filter times lil Module Properties Local 1 1756 1A16 3 1 General Connection Module Info Configuration Backplane Input Filter Time Points oft gt on On Off 0 7 ims v 9ms v 8 15 Laos i Vv Iv Iv Vv F z F Kakak a a i ERER Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Click OK Isolated and Non lsolated Varieties of Input Modules ControlLogix input modules provide isolated or non isolated witing options Some applications require power for the I O circuits to originate on separate isolated power sources Because these conditions require separate commons for each channel some input modules use individual 1solation or point to point isolation so if one point faults the others continue to operate Other
223. g 248 Appendix B Tt POS C DIR iia cee ete SroSpe a e e at lates Powe eels 249 Standard and Diagnostic Input Module Tags 249 Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags 255 Appendix C InttoGU Hola sas dosi eoa SEXIES Neu eye EE eU es 259 Using Message Instructions d ves sepa em mre o e eben 259 Processing Real time Control and Module Services 259 One Service Performed Per Instruction 4 evo ceti 260 UDIN MESE IT TE 260 Enter Message Configuration s iaa ore eod hb Ra 264 Cobthionragon Tab Sio os Re RR TER LE TEENS 265 Communication Tab 45 sve e bien ton Rte FOX Da PE 269 Use Timestamped Inputs and Scheduled Outputs 270 Reset a Fuse Perform Pulse Test Reset Latched Diagnostics 273 Perform a WHO to Retrieve Module Identification and Status 275 Review of Tags in Ladder Logie oues ctas Eo EX Sore 277 Table of Contents Choose Correct Power Supply Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules Major Revision Upgrades 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Glossary Index Appendix D Power Sine Chart oos oa dede at acute sha Mann s atk wae ie 279 Appendix E Mover Starter Chatt pasa ea e gs er CEA DU HOUR pet 281 Determine the Maximum Number of Motor Starters 282 Appendix F Introduction a ego doceo v i e edu d etate ete E aet et end 285 If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying I O Configuration 285 If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration 28
224. g number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 OA8E Attribute Temperature operating 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 2 Test 068 2 14 Tes Bd Operating Dry Heat Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 0A8E 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrou nding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test 068 2 14 Tes Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60 Relative humidity 068 2 30 Tes Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60 Vibrati on 068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g Q 10 500 Hz Shock IEC 60 operating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Shock IEC 60 186 honoperating 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 OA8E Attribute 1756 OA8E Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiate
225. guration Backplane Output State During Program Mode Fault Mode 0 off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Point Communications Failure f communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel 2 Click the pull down arrow to choose the Fault mode 3 Click OK 60 Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features Chapter 3 Output Data Echo During normal operation when a processor sends out an output command to the ControlLogix system the output module that is targeted for that command returns the commanded state of the output to the system This process verifies that the module has received the command and will try to execute it Other devices can use this broadcast signal through a listen only connection to determine the desired state of the output without having to interrogate the ownet controller Monitor Fault Bits The Output Data Echo only matches the commanded state of the outputs if the module is operating under normal conditions If there is an anomaly with the module the commanded state and the Output Data Echo may not match You can monitor the fault bits for your output points for fault conditions If a fault occurs the fault bit is set and your program alerts you to the condition In this case the output data e
226. here are situations where you might want to modify the default settings You can maintain custom settings on tabs from the Module Properties dialog box This section provides step by step instructions for creating default and custom configurations Topic TPag Create a New Module 114 Custom Settings Modify Default Configuration 120 Configure a Standard Input Module 124 Configure a Standard Output Module 125 Configure a Diagnostic Input Module 126 Configure a Diagnostic Output Module 126 Edit Configuration 127 Configure 1 0 Modules in a Remote Chassis 128 Input Online Service 129 Output Online Services 129 View and Change Module Tags 129 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 111 Chapter 6 112 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules IMPORTANT This section focuses on configuring O modules in a local chassis To configure 1 0 modules in a remote chassis you must follow all the detailed procedures with two additional steps See page 128 for the additional remote chassis procedures RSLogix 5000 programming software must be installed on your computer to complete the procedures for both default and custom configurations For software installation instructions and to learn how to navigate the software package see the RSLogix 5000 Getting Results Guide Configuration Process Overview Follow these basic steps to configure a ControlLogix digital I O module by usi
227. http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0B32 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V output module 1756 0B32 Simplified Schematic DC 0 B 2 OUI De Joo 7 E Group 0 OUT 3 au 3580 OUT 2 AN OUT 0 t CS OUT 5 g je 5 OUT 4 Ps UT 8 7 T a f RTN OUT 0 Daisy Chain H pub MN AI OUT 9 10 9 G OUT 8 l gt to Other OUT 11 ao 11a OUT 10 RTBs ControlLogix Backplane Interface OUT 13 CD 13 q OUT 12 T D m Ts E Display OUT 15 Ce 15 C OUT 14 DC 0 Ais 17 G RTN OUT 0 OUT 17 CD 2o 19 CO OUT 16 OUT 19 Qiz 21 OUT 18 Surge Current Chart OUT 21 Cb 23 E OUT 20 OUT 23 CD be 25 OUT 22 OUT25 D ge 27 OUT 24 1A Surge OUT 27 CD ao 29 K OUT 26 S Continuous 60 C 140 F 0UT 29 D 31 G OUT 28 05A OUT 31 CDs4 33 DI OUT 30 DC 1 G 36 35 RTN OUT 1 0 10 ms Time Technical Specifications 1756 0B32 e DC OUTPUT Attribute 1756 0B32 SAO ESG 8 Outputs 32 16 points group stag
228. i None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 1 For voltages above 132V AC the Interface Modules IFM are not an acceptable means to provide external fusing A rated terminal block for the intended application must be used 2 3 Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices 4 5 6 7 8 64 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protection for the mod principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit been reached All other channels with a NUT of that group will continue to operate as directe A fuse is provided on each common of this module for a total of two fuses The fuses are desi le from short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out the curren within milliseconds after its thermal cut out temperature has d by the module master CPU Bridge and so forth gned to protect the module from short circuit conditions The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it is likely that the fuse wil e externally installed be damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuses should b If a short circuit condition occurs on any channel within this module s group the entire group The module does not provide
229. iagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 78 The features described in this section are available on all ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules If the diagnostic change of state feature is enabled a diagnostic input module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events described in the table occurs Topic Requested packet interval Description A user defined rate at which the module updates the information sent to its owner controller This is also known as Cyclic Data Transfer Change of state Configurable feature that when enabled instructs the module to update its owner controller with new data whenever a specified input point transitions from On to Off and Off to On The data will be sent at the RPI rate where there is no change of state By default this setting is always enabled for input modules Diagnostic Change of State Information updates when any change in the diagnostics for an input module occurs Although the RPI occurs continuously this COS feature lets you to decide whether changes in a module s diagnostic detection should cause the module to send real time data to the owner controller 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Info Off gt On gt DU on
230. iagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment for example a drive or motor to alert people
231. ial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1756 IV16 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 174 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 IV16 Attribute EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 1756 IV16 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 6100
232. ibed in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B16IS Attrib Temperature operating 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 ute 1756 0B16IS 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Tempe rature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 M
233. ic 1756 0V16E ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused sinking output module 1756 0V16E Display Optoisolation a DC 0 4 our ie IAD outo re KD KD Y Y to 0UT 3 I o our2 ae EB TRB ve L OUT 0 IN Il 41 Group 0 OUT 5 Im ie OUT 4 Group 0 A e f H NUD RTN OUT iS ie our OUT 0 ControlLogix Electronic DC 0 ie ie RTN OUT 0 H m LI Backplane Fuse Circuitry H Interface OUT 9 lem ie OUT 8 14 3 OUT 11 1 ML OUT 10 KD GD Surge Current Chart T Tm OUT 13 IGS IES our sain 8 17 OUT 15 I NEH OUT 4 2A Surge es D DC 1 4 CIC RTN OUT 1 S 1A Continuous 60 C 140 C tl 3 ae ae 0 10 ms Time Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Diagnostics 1756 0V16E Attribute 1756 0V16E Short trip 5 A for 20 ms 24V DC output on then short 5 A for 20 ms Q 24V DC output on into short Time stamp of diagnostics 1 ms Technical Specifications 1756 0V16E C DCOUTPUT Attribute 1756 OV16E 38101234567 3 Output 16 elect lly fused 8 point HER utputs electronically fused 8 points group S
234. ic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 125V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1200V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 19 North American temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 1A16 Attribute 1756 1A16 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F EC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F EC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30
235. ics Pulse Test See Point level Electronic Fusing and Pulse Test in Chapter 4 for procedures and sample screens View and Change When you create a module a set of tags is created by the ControlLogix system that can be viewed in the Tag Editor of the RSLogix 5000 software Each Module Tags configured feature on your module has a distinct tag that can be used in the processor s ladder logic Follow these steps to access a module s tags Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 129 Chapter 6 130 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules choose Monitor Tags J Controller Logix5563 ll Controller F imi Power Up H Monitor Tags B Tasks A New Tag Ctr Ww MainTask ELSIE 15 7 MainPro Verify i unschedule Export Tags E1 3 Motion Groups S E Ungrouped Print 1 At the top of the Controller Organizer right click Controller tags and The Controller Tags dialog box appears with data Click the slot number of the module that you want to view information See Appendix B for details on viewing and changing a module s configuration tags Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter Module specific Information Introduction This chapter provides module specific information for all ControlLogix digital modules The table describes the different types of digital I O modules Digital 1 0 Type Description Diagnostic These modules provide diagnostic features to
236. iguration Notes 218 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Power Sizing Chart Choose Correct Power Supply Appendix D Use the chart to determine the power your ControlLogix chassis is using to prevent an inadequate power supply We recommend that you use this worksheet to check the power supply of each ControlLogix chassis used Slot Module Current Power Current Power Current Power Number Cat No 5 1V Q5 1VDC 924 24 3 3V 3 3V DC mA Watts VDC mA VDC DC mA DC Watts Watts 0 x5 1V x 24V x33V 1 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 2 x5 1V x 24V x33V 3 x5 1V x 24V x33V 4 X5 1V x 24V x33V 5 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 6 X5 1V x 24V X3 3V 7 X5 1V x 24V x33V 8 x5 1V x 24V x33V 9 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 10 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 11 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 12 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 13 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 14 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 15 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V 16 x5 1V x 24V X3 3V TOTALS mA W 1 mA W 2 mA W 3 This number This number This cannot cannot number exceed exceed 2800 cannot mA exceed 4000 mA 10000 mA for 1756 PA72 1756 PB72 13000 mA for 1756 PA75 1756PB75 1756 PC75 1756 PH75 These three wattage values 1 2 3 added together cannot exceed e 75 W Q 60 C 140 F for any power supply Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 219 Appendix D Choose Correct Power Su
237. imultaneously own an input module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Glossary network update time NUT The smallest repetitive time interval in which the data can be sent on a ControlNet network The NUT ranges from 2 ms to 100 ms owner controller The controller that creates and stores the primary configuration and communication connection to a module program mode In this mode the following events occur Controller program is not executing Inputs are still actively producing data Outputs are not actively controlled and go to their configured Program mode tack connection An I O connection where the 1756 CNB module collects digital I O words into a rack image to conserve ControlNet connections and bandwidth rack optimization A communication format in which the 1756 CNB module collects all digital I O words in the remote chassis and sends them to controller as a single rack image remote connection An I O connection where the controller establishes an individual connection with I O modules in a remote chassis removal and insertion under power RIUP ControlLogix feature that allows a user to install or remove a module or RTB while power is applied removable terminal block RTB Field wiring connector for I O modules requested packet interval RPI The maximum amount of time between broadcasts of I O data 305 Glossary 306 run
238. inal and maximum delay times for each module in Chapter 7 Connections With respect to ControlLogix I O modules a connection is the data transfer link between a controller and an I O module These are the connections Direct connections Rack connections The table lists the advantages disadvantages of each connection type Connection Type Advantages Disadvantages Direct connections All input and data echo With more data transferring information is transferred over the network your including diagnostic system does not operate as information and fusing data efficiently as with rack connections Rack connections Connection usage is Input and data echo economized The information is limited to owner controller has a general faults and data single RPI value for each connection Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 23 Chapter 2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System 24 Direct Connections A direct connection is a real time data transfer link between the controller and the device that occupies the slot that the configuration data references When module configuration data is downloaded to an owner controller the controller attempts to establish a direct connection to each of the modules referenced by the data If a controller has configuration data referencing a slot in the control system the controller periodically checks for the presence of a device there When a device s presence
239. ine DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Oscillatory surge withstand 3kV IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 IH161 Certification 1756 1H161 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File 65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 166 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 IM161 ControlLogix AC 159 265V input module
240. ion CNET UM001 For more information on the ControlLogix EtherNet IP Bridge module see EtherNet IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual publication ENET UM001 6 Repeat steps 1 6 to configure a communication module for the remote chassis 7 Configure the communication module in the remote chassis Now you can configure the remote I O modules by adding them to the remote communication module Follow the same procedures as you do for configuring local I O modules starting on page 114 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Chapter 6 Input Online Service Diagnostic input modules have an additional page of diagnostic service Reset Latched Diagnostics is not used when writing configuration only accessed during online monitoring This screen is accessed through the module s properties Follow these steps to perform a reset when a fault is latched in the set position 1 On the Modules Properties screen click the Diagnostics tab imi Module Properties Local 2 1756 IB16D 2 1 Ea General Connection Module Info Configuration Reset Point Latched Diagnostics Status Running Cancel Ev heip 2 Click Reset for the appropriate point setting in the Reset Latched Diagnostics column 3 Click OK Diagnostic output modules have additional features Output Online Services Electronic Fuse reset Reset Latched Diagnost
241. ires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B32 Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock None open style Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1756 0B32 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse
242. is detected there the controller automatically sends the configuration data If the data is appropriate to the module found in the slot a connection is made and operation begins If the configuration data is not appropriate the data is rejected and an error message appears in the software In this case the configuration data can be inappropriate for any of a number of reasons For example a module s configuration data may be appropriate except for a mismatch in electronic keying that prevents normal operation The controller maintains and monitors its connection with a module Any break in the connection such as module faults or removal of the module from the chassis while under power causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area associated with the module The RSLogix 5000 programming software monitors this data area to annunciate the modules failures Rack Connections When a digital I O module is located in a remote chassis with respect to its owner you may choose rack optimization or listen only rack optimization in the Comm Format pull down menu during the initial module configuration This depends on the bridge module configuration If the bridge module is selected for the Listen only rack option then the I O module allows only the Listen only rack option Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 A tack connection economizes connection usage b
243. ith 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 201 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Certifications 1756 OB8l Certification 1756 0B8I UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 202 Publication 1756 UMO058E
244. ith 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 OV16E Certification 1756 0V16E UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locatio
245. l Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 193 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 0B8 ControlLogix DC 10 30V output module Simplified Schematic
246. l Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http Awww ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 160 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 1G16 ControlLogix TTL input module Standard Wiring CE Compliant Wiring 1756 1G16 1756 IG16 DC _ 1 0 Wire 7 I I ay BEN IN 0 ia figs 2 2 ad Wee ID N3 Gp Gp 2 Rao n IN 2 i 3 T G IE N 5 ia ia 4 yoWie 4 as J ire DED M net ee ns aran a mas IN 6 DC Power Wire L CD ED pe ote GB E oc como 183 E5 De como tor SIE 2 m 3 KD Ie N 8 B TML input 3 TED GD Ns mu DID mio T TUS apacitor 11 ie ie IN 10 5V DC Power IZS d S 0 01 uF Typical z N 13 Go Isis 12 See notes below N 13 Ep IN 12 i i Eo was REB ED neva 15 fe amp IN 14 Tash LA ns DC 1 4 E DC COM 1 Det ED oc com T SD HH C f Simplified Schematic 5DC
247. lated groups and four terminals per output i i 1492 IFM40F FS 2 Isolated with extra terminals for 120V AC DC outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse 6 indicators for outputs 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 Isolated with extra terminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output 1492 IFM40F FS 4 Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output 296 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules Appendix G 1 0 Cat No IFM Cat No IFM Type IFM Description Pre wired Cable 1756 0B16E 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLEXX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F2 Fusible 120V AC DC with extra terminals for outputs 1492 IFM20F F24 2 Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators 1492 XIM2024 8R Relay Master 20 pin master with eight 24V DC relays 1492 XIM2024 16R 20 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays 1492 XIM2024 16RF 20 pin master with sixteen 24V DC relays with fusing 1492 XIM24 8R Relay Expander Expander with eight 24V
248. lation voltage Module specific Information 1756 OW16l 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output to output Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Chapter 7 Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style 0 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 7 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 OW16l Attribute 1756 0W16l Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpa
249. lative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 141 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 IA16l Attribute 1756 1A161 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Oscillatory surge withstand 3kV IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 IA161 Certification 1756 1A161 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class I Division 2 Gr
250. llen Bradley mes Meri Product Type Digital Input ss IEEE INE Module we OS Comm Format Full Diagnostics Input Data Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 3 F Open Mode Pepa Ez Communication is prevented Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 47 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features EXAMPLE In the following scenario Compatible Keying allows 1 0 communication The module configuration is for a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 2 1 The physical module is a 1756 IB16D module with module revision 3 2 In this case communication is allowed because the major revision of the physical module is higher than expected and the module determines that it is compatible with the prior major revision Module Configuration 17564B16D 16 Point 10V 30V DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley mue c Meade Local Product Type Digital Input e Dito Meco ste PI Module mn Ful Diagnostics Input Data Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Fra Major Revision 2 Minor Revision 1 I Open Moile Pepa an ce Communication is allowed Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IB16D Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2
251. m a local controller to generate timestamps To use diagnostic timestamps you must choose the appropriate Communication Format during initial configuration For more information on choosing a Communication Format on page 117 8 Point AC 16 Point DC Diagnostic ControlLogix digital I O modules provide various grouping of points on different modules The eight point AC modules and 16 point DC modules provide additional flexibility when designing module applications The greater number of points allows for more field devices to be attached to I O modules to boost efficiency Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 75 Chapter 4 1756 0A8D Diagnostic Fault Table Ladder commands output to be On ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Point level Fault Reporting Diagnostic I O modules set bits to indicate when a fault has occurred on a point by point basis The following fault conditions generate their own unique fault bits Unique Fault Bits for 1 0 Points Conditions setting a fault bit Input points Open wire Field power loss 1756 IA8D only Output points Fuse blown No load Output verify Field power loss 1756 IA8D only Using these bits in tandem with data echo and manually performing a pulse test can help to further isolate the fault The following table lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OA8D module Ladder commands output to be Off Possible cause of fault
252. m a5 OUT 8 Surge Current Chart H li OUT 11 m OUT 10 T 1 our 3 IES IEB our 2 Surge Group 1 18 17 Group 1 2A g OUT 15 Ies Id OUT 14 E 0 0 20 19 9 1A Continuous 60 C 140 F Cb ICD i RTN OUT 3 z 0 10 ms Time DC COM Technical Specifications 1756 0B16E DC mE Attribute 1756 0B16E s ces A Outputs 16 electronically fused 8 points group ST 89 10111213 ui 6 Voltage category 12 24N DC source FUSE fl Operating voltage range 10 31 2V DC ELECTRONICALLY FUSED Output delay me OFF to ON 70 us nom 1 ms max ON to OFF 360 us nom 1 ms max Current draw 5 1V 250 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 4 1 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 13 98 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max 1 mA per poin On state voltage drop max 400 mV DC Q 1A Current per point max 1A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 8A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point 2 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 3 mA per poin 206 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Technical Specifications 1756 0B16E Attribute Isolation voltage Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0B16E 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1
253. m scan it is possible for an input to change state during program scan execution The point must be buffered to prevent this from occurring Copy the input data from your input tags to another structure and use the data from there To minimize traffic and conserve bandwidth we recommend TIP e you use a larger RPI value if the COS option is used and the module is in the same chassis as its owner Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Input Modules in a Remote Chassis Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Chapter 2 Trigger Event Tasks When configured ControlLogix digital input modules can trigger an event task The event task lets you execute a section of logic immediately when an event that is receipt of new data occuts Your ControlLogix digital I O module can trigger event tasks whenever module input data state changes for example when a COS occurs Refer to these considerations when using a digital input module to trigger an event task Only one input module can trigger a specific event task Input modules trigger the event task based on the module s COS configuration The COS configuration defines which points prompt the module to produce data if they turn On or Off This production of data due to COS triggers the event task Typically enable COS for only one point on the module If you enable COS for multiple points a task ovetlap of the
254. mal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 144 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 1A32 Attribute 1756 1A32 EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 1A32 Certification 1756 1A32 UL UL Listed ndustrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certi CSA Certi LR69960C ied Process Control Eq ied Process Control Eq ipment See CSA File LR54689C ipment for Class Di
255. mal dissipation 15 35 BTU hr Off state voltage max 20V 134 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 IA8D Attribute 1756 IA8D Off state current max 2 5 mA On state current min 5 mA Q 74V AC On state current max 16 mA Q 132V AC Inrush current max 250 mA Input impedance max 8 25 kO 132V AC 60 Hz Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 125V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1200V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 IA8D Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2
256. mber 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level lation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1756 IN16 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IE IE IE C 60 C 60 C 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges IE C 61 000 4 3 Radiated RF immunity Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 0V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 0V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 0V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 171 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 IN16 Attribute 1756 IN16 EFT B immuni
257. me_at_which_Input_Changed with the last timestamp LastTimestamp The input point point 0 must have Change of State enabled or the timestamp will not update when the point transitions that is Off On Once Change of State has been detected 10 ms is added to the input timestamp and sent to the output module s timestamp This causes the output module to apply its output exactly 10 ms 10 000 us after the input changed state The MOVe instructions update LastTimestamp in preparation for the next change of state Timestamps are eight bytes in size two DINTS but only the lower IMPORTANT four bytes of the output timestamp that is Time_at_which_Ouput_Will_Change are used to schedule the outputs into the future to a max of 16 7 s or 16 700 000 us Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 271 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Local Delo 0 Local O0 Data D 0 pp aa Rung 4 is the standard XIC OTE rung that controls the output point based on the input point The only difference is the output module is configured for scheduled outputs The outputs will not get applied until the scheduled time has occurred The Controller Tags dialog box shows examples of the tags created in the ladder logic as displayed in the tag editor bottom of the screen Controller Tags cstl controller Emm
258. mmutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V ms for loads under 50 mA The commu commutatin exceeded in to increase dv dt rating P V 2 R ating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500 mA OUTPUT to L2 is 4V ms maximum If the g dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is the 10 50 mA range a resistor may be added across the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is he total output current to 50 mA I V R At 50 mA and above the module has a higher commutating When adding a resistor for the output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500 mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at fault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void of any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections 2 3 installation Environmental Specifications 1756 0A8 Attribute Maximum wire size req ires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 1756 0A8 Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 14 Tes Nb Operating Thermal Shock
259. module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance that can affect module operation 97 Chapter 5 98 Install the ControlLogix 1 0 Module Follow these steps to insert the module into the chassis 1 Align the circuit board with the top and bottom chassis guides Printed Circuit Board 20861 M 20862 M Installation of the module is now complete Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Install the ControlLogix I O Module Chapter 5 Key the Removable Key the removable terminal block RTB to prevent inadvertently connecting Terminal Block the wrong wiring in the RTB to your module Wedge and U shaped bands are manually inserted into the RTB and module respectively This process hinders a wired RTB from being accidentally inserted into a module that does not match the positioning of the respective tabs Key positions on the module that correspond to unkeyed positions on the RTB For example if you place a U shaped keying band in slot 4 on the module do not insert a wedge shaped tab in slot 4 on the RTB or your RTB will not mount on the module We recommend that you use a unique keying pattern for each slot in the chassis 1 To key the module insert the U shaped band with the longer side near the terminals 2 Push the band onto the module until it snaps into place 20850 M Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 99 Chapterb Install the ControlLogix 1 0
260. motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before removing the module 1 Unlock the locking tab at the top of the module 2 Open the RTB door by using the bottom tab 108 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Install the ControlLogix I O Module Chapter 5 3 Hold the spot marked PULL HERE and pull the RTB off the module IMPORTANT Do x wrap your fingers around the entire door A shock hazard exists 20855 M Remove the Module Follow these steps to remove a module from its chassis from the Chassis 1 Push in the top and bottom locking tabs Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 109 Chapterb X Install the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 2 Pull module out of the chassis 110 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Chapter b Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Introduction You must configure your module upon installation The module will not work until it has been configured In most cases you will use RSLogix 5000 programming software to configure yout digital I O module The programming software uses default configurations such as RPI filter times and so forth to get your I O module to communicate with the ownet conttoller However t
261. mp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 208 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0B16l ControlLogix DC 10 30V isolated output module imnlifi i 1756 0B161 Simplified Schematic Isdiatsd Sourcing Isolated Wiring we Output Wiring oe DC 0 4 Dco o DCO eh 14 OUT D DCO J DC 1 ay 4 OUT 1 d 3 2 5V l A DC2 DC 2 Djs sE ourz o D24 DC 3 QUIS LAS A Sim aia He lio OUTA 7 3 yu d i inki i SMS ili acr j CUTS Sinking Output Wiring DC 5 cp ng OUT 5 i DCS o DC6b ep msg OU
262. ms that is 40 Zero_Cross_Delay INT Pulse_Test_Parameters 6 Specifies how long to wait after the pulse is completed before declaring a fault Output verify delay parameter is needed to account for the hardware propagation delay Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 2 ms that is 20 Output_Verify_Delay INT Pulse_Test_Parameters 8 CST_Information SINT 20 Current CST Time from Module CST Information 0 Current Time DINT 2 Status of CST in Module Bit0 O timer OK 1 timer fault Bit1 O no ramping 1 ramping ramping indicates that once time is synchronized it will correct errors by slowly ramping to the master s time Bit2 O not time master 1 time master that is controller Bit3 O time not synced 1 time synced with master CST Information 8 CST Status INT Size of timer in bits CST Information 10 CST Timer Size INT Unused Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 CST Information 12 CST reserved 267 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Versions 9 and Earlier Source Destination Tag in MSG Instruction WHO Information SINT 47 268 Description Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from generic source destination buffers Source
263. n Data Input data Off On Status for each input point 1 bit per point Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 0 Off 1 0n 251 Appendix B Tag Definitions Diagnostic Input Data Tags Name Configuration or I 0 Data Definition Fault Input data Fault Status An ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and 1 bit per point input data for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost or inhibited then all points for the module will be faulted by the processor 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss or Comm Fault FieldPwrLoss Input data Field Power Loss AC input diagnostic detects that field power has failed or 1 bit per point is disconnected from the module Open Wire also is detected 0 No fault 1 Fault OpenWire Input data Open Wire Diagnostic that detects that a wire has been disconnected from 1 bit per point 252 the input point If a group of points shows this fault then possible the return L1 or GND is missing from the module Also see FieldPwrLoss 0 No fault 1 Fault Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Tag Definitions Appendix B Standard and Diagnostic Output Module Tags ControlLogix standard and diagnostic digital output modules have three types of tags Configuration structure of data sent
264. n of the time limitations with ControlLogix I O modules Input Modules As shown in the illustration below ControlLogix input modules receive a signal at the RTB and process it internally that is hardware delay filter delay ASIC delay before sending a signal to the backplane via the requested packet interval RPI or at a Change of State COS occurrence The RPI is a configured interval of time that determines when a module s data is sent to the controller Hardware Filter ASIC Mn O P SN Signal Applied Signal Sent to 42701 at the RTB i Backplane Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 21 Chapter 2 42702 22 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System The table defines some of the delay factors that affect the signal propagation on a module Delay Hardware Description How the module is configured and the variance between the type of modules affects how the signal is processed Filter User configuration varies between modules thus affecting the signal propagation ASIC ASIC scan 200 us Output Modules A typical delay time can be estimated despite the number of factors that may contribute For example if you are turning on a 1756 IB16 module at 24V DC in 25 C 77 F conditions the signal propagation delay is affected by ASIC scan 200 us hardware delay to energize the input typically 290 us on this us
265. n output module in a remote chassis connected to the owner controller by a scheduled ControlNet network in addition to instructing the owner controller to multicast the output data within its own chassis the RPI also reserves a spot in the stream of data flowing across the ControlNet network The timing of this reserved spot may or may not coincide with the exact value of the RPI But the control system will guarantee that the output module will receive data at least as often as the specified RPI as shown in the illustration below Remote Chassis TOA O O 8 8 9 i 8 i i i li o me o E t Data sent from a Output data at least g owner controller 8 as often as API A pi NN Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlNet 42675 The reserved spot on the network and the output data sent by the controller are asynchronous to each other This means there are Best and Worst Case scenarios as to when the owner controller will receive updated channel data from the module in a networked chassis 33 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix
266. n state current min 2mA Q 10V DC On state current max 13 mA Q 30V DC Inrush current max 250 mA Input impedance max 2 31 kQ 30V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T3C IEC temperature code T3 Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 IB16D Attribute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 IB16D 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 06
267. n terms of depth between an I O module by using a standard depth housing and one by using an extended depth housing Dimensions are in mm in 144 73 5 698 127 lt 131 75 gt 0 5 3 18 0 125 5 187 dime i 4 Rear Surface of LE ControlLogix Chassis Standard depth Housing NN Extended depth Housing g I NP UE 41682 The depth from the front of the module to the back of the chassis is as follows e Standard depth housing 147 91 mm 5 823 in Extended depth housing 157 43 mm 6 198 in 106 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Install the ControlLogix I O Module Chapter 5 Install the Removable This section shows how to install the RTB onto the module to connect the Terminal Block ais Shock hazard exists If the RTB is installed onto the module while the field side power is applied the RTB will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB s terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine motion or loss of process control can occur Exercise extreme caution when using this feature It is recommended that field side power be removed before installing the RTB onto the m
268. n the workstation into the controller Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 303 Glossary 304 electronic keying A feature where modules can be requested to perform an electronic check to make sure that the physical module is consistent with what was configured by the software exact match An electronic keying protection mode that requires the physical module and the module configured in the software to match according to vendor catalog number major revision and minor revision field side Interface between user field wiring and I O module inhibit A ControlLogix process that lets you configure an I O module but prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the controller behaves as if the I O module does not exist at all interface module IFM A module that uses pre wired cable to connect wiring to an I O module listen only connection An I O connection where another controller owns provides the configuration and data for the module major revision A module revision that is updated any time there is a functional change to the module minor revision A module revision that is updated any time there is a change to the module that does not affect its function or interface multicast Data transmissions that reach a specific group of one or more destinations multiple owners A configuration set up where multiple owner controllers use exactly the same configuration information to s
269. ne 2 On the Controller Organizer double click MainRoutine Expand MainProgram to see Main Routine as a sub menu item fo RSLogix 5000 Controller Digital IO 1756 File Edit View Search Logic Communications alsje S seel lol Offline RUN No Forces b Ba NoEdts 8 F yg Redundancy nog zi x Controller Controller Digital IO Controller Tags Controller Fault Handler 3 Power Up Handler B E Tasks E fa MainTask E C MainProgram A Program Tags Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C A graphic that looks like a ladder with rungs appears in the right side of the RSLogix 5000 software program You attach run time service such as a message instruction to the rungs and then download the information to a controller You can tell that the rung is in Edit mode because of the e at the left side of the rung 4 8 me rs 4 Alarms Bit mer Counter Input Output i Slelele SG O wel Message Message Control HON ER GSU SSV TOT Compare 3 Find then click MSG message instruction on the instruction toolbar The MSG icon is among the formats on the Input Output tab of the instruction toolbar You also can drag and drop an instruction icon onto a rung A green dot appeats when a valid location is detected for the instruction on the rung
270. ne open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Environmental Specifications 1756 0C8 Attribute Temperature operating IE IE IE C 60 C 60 C 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 0C8 0 60 C 32 140 F Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g Q 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 1
271. ne wee Gene he OS 182 LI 562 ONE ads feasts leat oye ao a al POR EM 185 T56 OTO eand Loa Beto Sibi heeled Ue Meade ens 188 T56 O NTOL Lus tutes ted uites eec Sites t tete ets 191 Tdb6 OB8z d e A ose t I o Rd at orte erre 194 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 Troubleshoot Your Module Tag Definitions Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Table of Contents I0 ODBBIE a Deen seen tie WEN ew RE 197 1150 GI 94s ste heats rene ee dunt oa an ne eet 200 LIO BUGIS raone Eod dtes She M es os LEE ue 203 1750 ODIOB too coepere ahha Steed 3 DEAS 206 1750 OD10l1 214 54 19e boob Ibid de 209 TOI BUGIS Low esee Creoles MEE EEIDUASA He e 212 1750 OBI aaa on rior ban auto dte oq M RE 215 ILS p Tm 218 TSO OG 18 aid e trs bove tuoi d eS ERES 221 1250 OLISI eid oe ege ie a oes tale qu acest E i 224 1756 NIB eod aso per rA S Lado ic aed uutun Saba ore 227 1355009 V VO E iUd et teg um E Prou rh By le Qu 230 T70 OVS B toa dates A xu he cette SEDEM LEES 233 ETO NG Mit o ea ad a ied Sia uu Les tah 236 L7G XBT a 04 ahs Geind led halew t Dried eaat piae 239 Appendix A Int5oQdu OB serae ch weed a pe dta hed tcp s edo UE puc Rua 243 Status Indicators for Input Modules o n unuan 243 Status Indicators for Output Modules 004 245 Use RSLogix 5000 software for Troubleshooting 247 Fault Type Determination usa yu oae tor E dr doe arb c
272. nfiguration T7564A18 16 Point 79V 132V AC Input Vendor Allen Bradley Ga HERES Product Type Digital Input Sa gt UN Module Catalog Number 1756 IA16 n ES Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 1 FF Open Medde Popes Sale Communication is prevented Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Analog Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IF16 Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 49 Chapter 3 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features 50 IMPORTANT In the following scenario Disable Keying allows 1 0 communication e The module configuration is for a 1756 1A16 digital input module The physical module is a 1756 IB16 digital input module In this case communication is allowed because the two digital modules share common data formats Module Configuration 17581416 16 Pont 7V 132VAC roat Vendor Allen Bradley IE Digia mp Mode sel 3 Product Type Digital Input Module Major Revision 2 Minor Revision 1 IV gen Hodie Poets Catalog Number 1756 IA16 Eeee kawe refero s Communication is allowed Physical Module Vendor Allen Bradley Product Type Digital Input Module Catalog Number 1756 IB16 Major Revision 3 Minor Revision 2 Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the 1 0 communication connection to the module to be di
273. ng the RSLogix 5000 software 1 Create a new module 2 Accept the default configuration or change it to specific configuration customized for the module 3 Edita configuration for a module when changes are needed Each of these steps 1s explained in detail in the following pages A chart that shows the full configuration profile is on page 113 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital I O Modules Chapter 6 Full Configuration Profile Diagram New Module 1 Choose a module from the list 2 Choose a Major Revision f Naming Screen Name Description Slot number Comm format Minor revision Keying choice Click a tab to set specific configuration Click OK to use default configuration Tabs i OK Button Make custom Series of configuration gt Application choices here Specific Screens Configuration Complete Edit Configuration Y Series of tabs in RSLogix 5000 software provide access to change a module s configuration data 41058 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 113 Chapter6 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Create a New Module After starting the RSLogix 5000 programming software and creating a controller you are ready to create a new module You can use a default configuration of set up a custom or
274. nically fused group 8 points group FUSE I x Voltage category 120 240V AC Ad Operating voltage range 74 265V AC FUSE I 0 47 63 Hz Output delay time OFF to ON 9 3 ms 60 Hz 11 ms 50 Hz ON to OFF 9 3 ms 60 Hz 11 ms 50 Hz Current draw 5 1V 400 mA 188 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 0A16 Attribute 1756 0A16 Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 6 5 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 22 17 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 3 mA per point On state voltage drop max 1 5V Q 0 5 A 5 7V load current 50 mA Current per point max 0 5 A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 4 A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point WEE ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C Load current min 10 mA per point Commutating voltage 4V us for loads gt 50 mA 0 2V us for loads lt 50 mA Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Inhibit voltage max Zero crossing 60V peak Removable terminal block 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temper
275. nication Formats Data Return Module returns input data the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the input data changes and diagnostic data diagnostic modules only Communication Format Full diagnostic input data Module 1756 IA8D IB16D This choice has the same definition as Full diagnostic input data except that it is a listen only connection Listen only full diagnostic input data 1756 IA8D IB16D As with input modules the number and type of choices varies depending on which output module you are using and whether it is in a local or remote chassis The table describes the communication formats used with output modules Output Module Communication Formats Data Return The owner controller sends the module only output data Communication Format Output data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Scheduled output data The owner controller sends all digital output words to the remote chassis as a single rack image Rack optimization These choices have the same definition as those above except that they are listen only connections Listen only output data Listen only rack optimization Module 1756 0A8 OA161 OB8 OB8I OB161 OB161S 0B32 OC8 0616 0H8l ON8 0W161 OX8l Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Config
276. nk at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 187 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 0A16 ControlLogix AC 74 265V output module Simplified Schematic L1 0 1756 0A16 ControlLogix pas Backplane m J TO j 45V pr OUTA iam OUT 0 Interface S a KD KD L3 P roup DUANE IE d OUT 3 NES OUT 2 4 Daisy Chain OUT 5 3 E OUT 4 Group 0 Fused per Group to Other Dg Display RTBs OUT 7 ee 3 OUT 6 a ERE NA 1 10 9 E due E a L1 0 IGS EBI uo HY AN 7 12 1i INE Sr 7 OUTO QUT 9 IE ie OUT 8 ControlLogix Backplane Interface m IH OUT 11 Has Ir OUT 10 KO ED Group 1 OUT 13 IE ie OUT 12 T p1 Surge Current Chart iD D OUT 15 3 OUT 14 s Per G ae urge er Group hay IF 20A L1 1 O u S Per Group Ex c 0 43 ms Time Diagnostics 1756 0A16 Attribute 1756 0A16 Time stamp of diagnostics 1 ms Fuse blown 1 fuse and indicator group Technical Specifications 1756 0A16 Q ACOUTPUT Attribute 1756 0A16 SEM deus 8 Outputs 16 mecha
277. nning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 OV16E Attribute 1756 0V16E Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 231 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 0V16E Attribute 1756 0V16E Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m w
278. nostic data changes state FaultLatchEn 1 bit per point Configuration Fault is Latched If enabled for a point any OpenWire or FieldPwrLoss stays latched in the faulted state even if the fault no longer exists until you clear the fault 0 Disable 1 Enable latching FieldPwrLossEn 1 bit per point Configuration Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 0 Disable 1 Enable FilterOnOff_0_7 1 byte per group Configuration Filter Times On to Off Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for On to Off transition Operates on groups of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 9 18 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms FilterOffOn 0 7 1 byte per group Configuration Filter Times Off to On Filter time for digital filter in digital input modules for Off to On transition Operates on groups of eight points Valid DC filter times 0 1 2 ms Valid AC filter times 1 2 ms OpenWireEn Configuration Open Wire Enables Open Wire diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable Diagnostic Input Data Tags Name Configuration or I 0 Data Definition CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp can be configured to 8 bytes indicate the time that data changed see COSOffOnEn COSOnOffEn COSStatus DiagCOSDisable and or the time that a diagnostic fault occurred see OpenWireEn Field PwrLossE
279. ns 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 232 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 0V32E ControlLogix DC 10 30V electronically fused sinking output module Simplified Schematic p Daisy Chain to 1756 0V32E Daisy Chain to Display Optoisolation Other RTBs ES Other RTBs a ours l l ouro g an ours TED 0 Y REDE SD OUT p OUTO OUTS js TEM OUT 7 s OUT 4 4 OUTS TED 1o OUT 0UT M TE 2 OUT OUT 0 OUT 13 enu 0 ControlLogix Electronic OUT 15 TES 16 OUT Backplane Fuse Circuitry DC Ol Cs RT Interface OUTA7 ED 20 o0 OUT 19 z OUI OUT 21 D5 2 OUT Surge Current Chart 0UT23 CD 26 OUT OUT 25 D 28 OUT 0UT27 D 30 OUT 2A Surge QUT29 32 OUT OUT 31 Qa OUT 0 0 B dA Continuous 60 C 140 F DC 1 4 Ef 36 RI c 0 10 ms Time Diagnostics 1756 0V32E Attribute 1756 0V32E Short trip 5
280. ns the program uses the instructions down the ladder always on init 0 4 RRR always on 1 T init Ov 4 Move Source Time at which Input Changed 0 991817889 Dest LastTimestamp 991817889 ov Move Source Time at which Input Changed 1 7 Dest LastTimestamp1 7 Rungs 0 and 1 are used to detect the transition from Program to Run mode This is used to turn On init which causes the program to initialize its tags Rung 2 only executes once and initializes the LastTimestamp LastTimestamp is used to detect a Change of State on the input point by checking to see if the timestamp of the input data has changed Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C tt mii 3 Not Equal Add rr Source A Time st which Input Changed Source A Time al which Input Changed 0 991817889 991817889 Source B LastTinestamp0 Source B 1000 991817889 Dest Time at which Input Changed EQ 991827089 Not Equal Source A Time at which Input Changed 1 mio T4 Move Source B LastTimestampl Source Time at which Input Changed 0 74 991817889 Dest LastTimestamp 991817889 mio Move Source Time at which Input Changed 1 7e Dest LastTimestampl 74 Rung 3 is the main rung that checks for Change of State on the input point by comparing the current input timestamp that is Ti
281. nt max 1756 1A161 250 mA Input impedance max 8 8 kQ 132V AC 60 Hz Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 125V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input to input Routine tested 1200V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 12 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type None open style 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 IA161 Attrib ute 1756 1A161 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Tempe rature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Re
282. o identify the exact point faulted IMPORTANT Only enable field power loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation Follow these steps to enable or disable field power loss detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 3 1756 OA8D 3 1 Enable Diag Latching v ITTA XI SI XI XI XII XI XI Vv r Vv r r Vv Vv Vv Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode C Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the Field Power Loss column Click the box to enable the feature for a specific point Clear the check mark to disable the feature for a specific point 3 Click OK Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules If the Diagnostic Change of State feature is enabled a diagnostic output module sends new data to the owner controller when one of the events desctibed in the table occurs Topic Description Receipt of output data Output module sends data when it echoes back to the owner con
283. odule Before installing the RTB make certain field side wiring of the RTB has been completed RTB housing is snapped into place on the RTB RTB housing door is closed locking tab at the top of the module is unlocked 1 Align the top bottom and left side guides of the RTB with the guides on the module 0 19 3 f VEn E E EN VOR SE ee E BPA a ce 4 Top Guide a7 M vie S IN EN is es N L Y A Bottom Guide 20853 M 2 Press quickly and evenly to seat the RTB on the module until the latches snap into place Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 107 Chapterb Install the ControlLogix 1 0 Module 3 Slide the locking tab down to lock the RTB onto the module 20854 M Remove the Removable If you need to remove the module from the chassis you must first remove the RTB from the module Terminal Block Shock hazard exists If the RTB is removed from the module while the field side power is applied the module will be electrically live Do not touch the RTB s terminals Failure to observe this caution may cause personal injury The RTB is designed to support Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP However when you remove or insert an RTB with field side power applied unintended machine
284. odule and troubleshoot your application Agency Certification Class 1 Division 2 agency certification for any application that requires approval Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules 1 0 Module in the ControlLogix System ControlLogix modules mount in a ControlLogix chassis and use a removable terminal block RTB or a Bulletin 1492 Interface Module cable to connect all field side wiring Before you install and use your module you should install and ground a 1756 chassis and power supply To install these products refer to the publications listed in Additional Resources on page 11 order and receive an RTB or IFM and its components for your application RTBs and IFMs are not included with your module purchase See page 101 for RTBs and page 287 for IFMs Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Cat No Description Page 1756 IA8D 79 132V AC 8 point diagnostic input module 134 1756 IA16 74 132V AC 16 point input module 137 1756 IA161 79 132V AC 16 point isolated input module 140 1756 1A32 74 132N AC 32 point input module 143 1756 IB16 10 31 2V DC 16 point input module 146 1756 IB16D 10 30V DC diagnostic input module 149 1756 IB16l 10 30V DC 16 point isolated input module 152 1756 IB32 10 31 2V DC 32 point input module 155 1756 1C16 30 60V DC 16 point input module 158 1756 IG16 Transitor transitor l
285. of each keying option when selecting between them For some specific module types fewer options are available Electronic keying is based on a set of attributes unique to each product revision When a Logix5000 controller begins communicating with a module this set of keying attributes is considered Keying Attributes Attribute Description Vendor The manufacturer of the module for example Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley Product Type The general type of the module for example communication adapter AC drive or digital 1 0 Product Code The specific type of module generally represented by its catalog number for example 1756 IB161 Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities and data exchange formats of the module Typically although not always a later that is higher Major Revision supports at least all of the data formats supported by an earlier that is lower Major Revision of the same catalog number and possibly additional ones Minor Revision A number that indicates the module s specific firmware revision Minor Revisions typically do not impact data compatibility but may indicate performance or behavior improvement You can find revision information on the General tab of a module s Properties dialog box Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 General Tab Revision 7 1 zi Electronic Keying Compati
286. of outputs by using position and velocity information of any motion axis When the 1756 OB16IS module is specified as the output source for the MACC instruction then the MAOC instruction automatically handles the time based output scheduling and enables it on the first eight outputs on the 1756 OB16IS module The benefit of using output scheduling in this manner is that the resolution of the output control is improved from the motion coarse update rate typically 1 32 ms to 100 ps 53 Chapter 3 54 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features You can also use the second eight outputs on the 1756 OB16IS module with the MAOC instruction However only the first eight outputs have 100 ps resolution The second eight outputs are updated at the motion coatse update rate Module Major Revision Considerations with Timestamping When using timestamping for inputs or diagnostic timestamping of I O modules the following conditions may occut depending on the module s Major Revision If the module has a Majot Revision 1 it will always return a positive timestamping value If the module has a Major Revision gt 2 it will return a negative timestamping value until the module is synchronized with the owner controller and the first change of state condition occurs Look at the Module Properties dialog box of RSLogix 5000 software to determine if the module has been synchronized with the owner controller and whether the contr
287. ogic TTL input module 161 1756 IH161 90 146V DC 16 point isolated input module 164 1756 IM161l 159 265V AC 16 point isolated input module 167 1756 IN16 10 30V AC 16 point input module 170 1756 IV16 10 30V DC 16 point sourcing current input module 173 1756 IV32 10 30V DC 32 point sourcing current input module 176 1756 048 74 265V AC 8 point output module 19 1756 0A8D 74 132V AC 8 point diagnostic output module 182 1756 OA8E 74 132V AC 8 point e fused output module 185 1756 0A16 74 265V AC 16 point output module 188 1756 0A161 74 265V AC 16 point isolated output module 191 1756 0B8 10 30V DC 8 point output module 194 f The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Chapter 1 Types of ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Cat No Description Page 1756 OB8EI 10 30V DC 8 point e fused isolated output module 197 1756 OB8l 10 30V DC 8 point isolated output module 200 1756 0B16D 19 2 30V DC 16 point diagnostic output module 203 1756 OB16E 10 31 2V DC 16 point e f
288. ogic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration You can use ladder logic to perform run time services on your module For example page 91 shows how to reset an electronic fuse on the 1756 OB16D module by using RSLogix 5000 softwate This appendix provides an example of how to teset the same fuse without using RSLogix 5000 software In addition to performing run time services you can use ladder logic to change configuration Chapter 6 explained how to use the RSLogix 5000 software to set configuration parameters in your ControlLogix digital I O module Some of those parameters may also be changed through ladder logic Using Message Instructions In ladder logic you can use Message instructions to send occasional services to any ControlLogix I O module Message instructions send an explicit service to the module causing specific behavior to occur For example unlatching a high alarm can be performed by a message instruction Message instructions maintain the following characteristics Messages use unscheduled portions of system communication bandwidth One service is performed per instruction Performing module setvices does not impede module functionality such as sampling inputs or applying new outputs Processing Real time Control and Module Services Services sent through message instructions are not as time critical as the module behavior defined during configuration and maintained by a real time connection Therefore
289. oller is synchronized with the CST For more information on synchronizing owner controllers and modules with the CST see the ControlLogix System User Manual publication 1756 UM001 Producer Consumer Model By using the Producer Consumer model ControlLogix I O modules can produce data without having been polled by a controller first The modules produce the data and any other owner controller device can decide to consume it For example an input module produces data and any number of processors can consume the data at the same time This eliminates the need for one processor to send the data to another processor For a more detailed explanation of this process see Input Module Operation Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 Status Indicator Information Each ControlLogix digital I O module has a status indicator on the front of the module that lets you check the module health and operational status of a module The status indicator displays vary for each module Status Description 1 0 status This yellow display indicates the On Off state of the field device ST IMPORTANT For the 1756 OA8D and 1756 OA8E modules the I O status indicator does not illuminate without field power applied Module status This green display indicates the module s communication status OK Fault status This display is only found on some modules and indicates the
290. on 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 IB161 Attribute 1756 IB161 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 10096 AM Q 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 153 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 IB16l Attribute
291. on type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 21 orth American temperature code T5 EC temperature code T5 Enclosure type to traditional True High logic 2 3 None open style TTL inputs are inverted 0 2 0 8 low voltage True On Use a NOT instruction in your program to convert Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 1G16 Attribute Temperature operating IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 1G16 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nono
292. onoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60 Relative humidity 068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60 Vibrati on 068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g 10 500 Hz Shock operating IEC 60 192 068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 30g Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Environmental Specifications 1756 0A161 Attribute Shock nonoperating IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock 50g 1756 0A16l Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4kV at 5 Hz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz Oscillatory surge withstand IEEE C37 90 1 Certifications 1756 OA16l 3 kV Certification 1756 0A161 UL UL Listed Industrial Contro
293. operating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Surge transient immunity IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 225 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Certifications 1756 OH8I Certification 1756 0H8l UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity E
294. or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 100 mA Current draw Q 24V 3mA Power dissipation max 5 8 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 19 78 BTU hr Off state voltage max 40V Off state current max 25mA On state current min 5 mA 159V AC 60 Hz On state current max 13 mA 265V AC 60 Hz Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 167 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 IM161 Attribute On state voltage 1756 IM161 159 265V AC 47 159 265V AC 47 159 253V AC 47 159 242V AC 47 63 Hz Q 30 C 86 F all channels ON 63 Hz 40 C 104 F 8 points ON 63 Hz 45 C 113 F all channels ON 63 Hz Q 60 C 140 F all channels ON Inrush current max 250 mA Input impedance max 20 38 kQ 265V AC 60 Hz Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input to input Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block housing 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4 Enclosure type 0 159 159 59 59 2 3 Environmental Specifications 1756 IM161 Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60
295. ormation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 1B32 Attribute Temperature operating 1756 1B32 0 60 C 32 140 F EC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F EC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold EC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat EC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing EC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz 156 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010
296. ors and extra terminals for inputs 1756 IB16 1492 IFM20F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExX x cable length 1492 IFM20FN Narrow standard 1492 IFM20F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM20F 3 3 wire sensor type input devices 1492 IFM20D24 Status indicating Standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24N Narrow standard with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20D24A 2 24V AC DC status indicators and extra terminals for inputs 1492 IFM20D24 3 3 wire sensor with 24V AC DC status indicators 1492 IFM20F F24A 2 Fusible Extra terminals with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for inputs 1756 IB16D 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40F 2 Extra terminals 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFMAOF F24AD 4 Fusible Fused with 24V DC blown fuse low leakage indicators four isolated groups and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input 1756 IB16l 1492 IFM40F Feed through Standard 1492 CABLExY x cable length 1492 IFM40DS24A 4 Status indicating Isolated with 24V AC DC status indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 Fusible Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per input 1492 IFM40F FSA 4 Isolated with 120V AC DC with four terminals per input
297. oup A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations T V T V Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 142 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 IA32 ControlLogix AC 74 132V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 1A32 IN 0 V al z r IN 1 a p 1E NO Cc E t t IN 3 D4 3 IN 2 eg 12 0 Ea Te E Group 0 IN5 HESle sh N4 Groupo C gt NN L Ez ae 4 roup 1 roup _ di IN 7 le 78 N 6
298. ourcing current input module 1756 0A8 74 265V AC 8 point output module 1756 OA8E 74 132V AC 8 point e fused output module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 39 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Cat No Description 1756 0A16 74 265V AC 16 point output module 1756 0A161 74 265V AC 16 point isolated output module 1756 OB8 10 30V DC 8 point output module 1756 OB8EI 10 30V DC 8 point e fused isolated output module 1756 OB8 10 30V DC 8 point isolated output module 1756 OB16E 10 31 2V DC 16 point e fused output module 1756 OB161l 10 30V DC 16 point isolated output module 1756 OB16IS 10 30V DC scheduled isolated output module 1756 0B32 10 31 2V DC 32 point output module 1756 0C8 30 60V DC 8 point output module 1756 0616 Transitor transitor logic TTL output module 1756 0H8l 90 146V DC 8 point isolated output module 1756 ON8 10 30V AC 8 point output module 1756 OV16E 10 301V DC 16 point e fused sinking current output module 1756 0V32E 10 30V DC 32 point electronically fused sinking current output module 1756 OW16l 10 265V 5 150V DC 16 point isolated contact module 1756 OX8I 10 265V 5 150V DC 8 point isolated contact module ihill ControlLogix digital input modules interface to sensing devices and detect Input Module Compatibility gix digital inp g whether they are On or Off ControlLogix inpu
299. ped with a plastic tie RTB Wiring Recommendations Consider the following guidelines when you are wiring your RTB Begin wiring the RTB at the bottom terminals and move up Use a tie to secure the wires in the strain relief area of the RTB e A jumper bar is shipped with certain I O modules to assist in installation For an example of when to use the jumper bar see the 1756 IA161 wiring diagram Extra jumper bars may be purchased by ordering catalog number 1756 JMPR Order and use an extended depth housing catalog number 1756 TBE for applications that require heavy gauge wiring For more information see page 105 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 103 Chapterb Install the ControlLogix I O Module Assemble the Removable Removable housing covers the wired RTB to protect wiring connections when the RTB is seated on the module Parts of the catalog number 1756 TBCH RTB example below are identified in the table Terminal Block and Housing 20858 M Item Description 1 Housing cover 2 Groove 3 Side edge of RTB 4 RTB 5 Strain relief area Follow these steps to attach the RTB to the housing 1 Align the grooves at the bottom of each side of the housing with the side edges of the RTB 2 Slide the RTB into the housing until it snaps into place IMPORTANT If additional wire routing space is required for your application use the extended depth housing catalog number1756 TBE 104 Publication 1756 UMO058E
300. per Electronically fused point basis Electronic protection is not intended to replace fuses circuit breakers or other code required wiring protection devices 7 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protec short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milli emperature has been reached All other channels will continue to operate as module master CPU Bridge and so forth 3 The electronic protection of this module has been designed to provide protec short circuit conditions The protection is based on a thermal cut out principle In the event of a short circuit condition on an output channel that channel will limit the current within milli emperature has been reached Other channels could produce a false error on o the supply dropping below the minimum detect level of 19 2V DC The output channels that are affected by his phenomena will continue to operate as directed by the module master C his means is that the output verify fault signals of the other channels should be checked and reset if a short circuit on one channel occurs ion for the module from seconds after its thermal cut out directed by the ion for the module from seconds after its thermal cut out the output verify fault signal due PU Bridge and so forth What 8
301. perating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Tes Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat 5 95 noncondensing Vibrati on IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating 2g Q 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 27 Tes Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity IEC 61000 4 2 6 kV contact discharges 8 kV air discharges IEC 61000 4 3 Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity IEC 61000 4 4 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports Conducted RF immunity IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 1G16 Certification 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz 1756 1616 UL UL Listed ndustrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certi CSA Certi LR69960C ied Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C ied Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File CE European EN6 EN6 EN6 EN6 European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive
302. pment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV TUV Certified for Functional Safety 1 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Capable of SIL 2 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details 211 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Simplified Schematic 1756 0B16lS ControlLogix DC 10 30V scheduled isolated output module Isolated Wiring
303. pply Notes 280 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Motor Starter Chart Appendix E Motor Starters for Digital 1 0 Modules This appendix provides data to help you choose a ControlLogix digital I O module to drive Bulletin 500 series motor starters in your application The tables list the number of motor starters five sizes are listed for each module that a particular digital I O module can drive IMPORTANT When using the tables remember that the supply voltage for each module must not drop below the minimum state motor starter supply voltage Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 120V AC 60 Hz Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 1756 0A16l 16 15 30 C 86 F 13 30 C 86 F 8 30 C 86 F 5 30 C 86 F 12 60 C 140 F 10 60 C 140 F 6 60 C 140 F 4 Q 60 C 140 F 1756 OA16 16 14 4 None None Only 7 per group Only 2 per group 1756 0A8 8 8 8 8 30 C 86 F 5 30 C 86 F 6 60 C 140 F 4 60 C 140 F 1756 OA8D 8 8 8 None None 1756 OA8E 8 8 8 6 6 30 C 86 F Only 3 per group only 3 per group 4 Q 60 C 140 F Only 2 per group Maximum Allowed 2 3 Pole Motor Starters 230V AC 60 Hz Cat No Motor Starters Size 0 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 Size 5 1756 0A16l 16 16 16 16 30 C 86 F 11 30 C 86 F 13 60 C 140 F 9
304. programming software generates the configuration data for each I O module in the control system whether the module is in a local or remote chassis A remote chassis also known as networked contains the I O module but not the module s owner controller A remote chassis can be connected to the controller via a scheduled connection on the ControlNet network or an EtherNet IP network RSLogix 5000 configuration data is transferred to the controller during the program download and subsequently transferred to the appropriate I O modules I O modules in the local chassis and modules in a remote chassis connected via the EtherNet IP network or unscheduled connections on the ControlNet network are ready to run as soon as the configuration data has been downloaded Howevet to enable scheduled connections to I O modules on the ControlNet network you must schedule the network by using RSNetWorx for ControlNet software Running RSNetWorx software transfers configuration data to I O modules on a scheduled ControlNet network and establishes a network update time NUT for the ControlNet network that is compliant with the desired communication options specified for each module during configuration Anytime a controller references a scheduled connection to I O modules on a scheduled ControlNet network you must run RSNetWorx software to configure the ControlNet network Refer to the following general steps when configuring I O modules 1 Configure all
305. protection against reverse polarity wiring or wiring to AC power is turned o SOUICES The recommended fuse for this module has been sized to provide short circuit protection for wiring only channel it is likely that the transistor or relay associated with that channel will be damaged and the module should be replaced or a spare output channel used for the load The fuse does not provide overload protection In the event of an overload on an output channel it associated with that channel will be damaged To provide overload protection for your application user supplied fuse should be installed externally and properly sized to match the individual load characteristics not blow and the output device associated with that channel will f o external loads In the event of a short circuit on an output is likely that the fuse will not blow and the transistor or relay The ControlLogix system has been agency certified using only the ControlLogix RTBs 1756 TBCH 1756 TBNH 1756 TBSH and 1756 TBS6H Any application that requires agency certification of the ControlLogix system using other wiring termination methods may require application specific approval by the certifying agency Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features Chapter 3 Field Power Loss Detection For the standard digital output modules the Field Power Loss detection feature i
306. put modules 67 system time diagnostic timestamp 75 schedule outputs 72 timestamping inputs 72 309 Index T timestamping diagnostic timestamp 75 marking input data with time reference 72 tips conserving ControlNet bandwidth 28 listen only communication format 117 using pulse test 89 troubleshooting fault status 55 73 l O status 55 73 module status indicators 16 55 73 310 W wiring connections choosing extended depth housing 105 field wiring options 62 84 Isolated and non isolated modules 80 isolated and non isolated modules 59 recommendations for wiring RTB 103 using an interface module IFM 14 the RTB 14 99 100 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com support you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www tockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience an anomoly within the firs
307. q V rien L_y rmo Fey 3 eel ouro VER x X Dc TED 5 DBL ours i im RTN OUT 1 a 7 TDR our OUT 0 lt Z Y 2 L l DC 2 ho 90 OUT 2 A Ems Al gt n e mor 0E neo ourz ww OUT 0 Dc3 ED 13 D 0UT 3 v RINOUF3 OE 15 CD ours Display Outpu RTN r a 0E vjep ou 4 z P 1 1 V ControlLogix Backplane Device OUT 0 ME m mon Tp 19 EDT ours Interface e _ DC 5 giz 2160 OUT 5 e e RINOUTS D 2 23 DT ours DC6 p 26 25 oute 47 e Surge Current Chart EM pinouts Icy ios zr d ours Surge n i amp DCJ CD 29 8 OUT 7 y 4A RINOUT7 52 31 0 OUT7 2 Daisy Chain to Not Used gia 33 CD Not Used Other RTBs Not Used CD se ss CD Not Used 4 T ro S Continuous 60 C 140 F E 2A c LLL i c H 4 0 10 ms Time DC COM Q DCOUTPUT 3 ST012345670 FUSE01234567K 6 ELECTRONICALLY FUSED Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Diagnostics 1756 OB8El Attribute 1756 OB8EI Short trip 4 5 A for 500 us max output on then short gt 4 5 A for 1 5 ms max output on into short Timestamp of diagnostics 1ms Technical Specifications 1756 OB8El Attribute 1756 OB8EI Outputs 8 individually isolated Voltage category 2 24N DC so
308. quirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations TUV 1 238 TUV Certified for Functional Safety Capable of SIL 2 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 1756 0X8l Module specific Information Chapter 7 ControlLogix AC 10 240V DC 5 125V isolated contact module 1756 0X8l Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring 9 2 114 OUTONC 24V aa L0 O 110 Fels 3g OUT 0 N O ene Linn RAGE L1 1 ay 6 50 OUT 1 N C BE i 5 L1 1 E 8 7 D OUT 1N 0 pooh Qi iar DC 2 O L2 Hep vo pr our2Nc ControlLogix 2 OUT 0 N C 11 2 Heu n QUT2 NO o DC2 Backplane l Co L1 3 TE 14 E OUT 3 N C Interfac
309. r each module s density are used For example the 1756 IA16I module has a module fault word of 32 bits But because this is a 16 point module only the first 16 bits bits 0 15 are used in the module fault word 93 Chapter4 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Fault bits in the field powet loss word and open wite word are logically entered into the module fault word In other words depending on the module type a bit set in the module fault wotd can mean multiple things as indicated in the table Condition Bit set Communications fault All 32 bits are set to 1 regardless of the module s density Field power loss Only the bit affected is set to 1 Open wire The following illustration provides an overview of the fault reporting process for digital input modules Bit 31 E Module fault Word 1 1 All modules A communications fault sets all bits in the module fault word A field power loss or open wire condition sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word p Group Group 0 Field Power Loss Word 1 1756 IA8D onl Jj A loss of field power sets the bit for that group in the field power loss word and also sets the appropriate bit in the module fault word Open Wire Word 1
310. r sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value Scheduled output data per point 1756 OB16IS only The 1756 OB16IS module does not support the Rack optimization Listen only rack optimization and Scheduled output data communication formats Electronic Keying When you configure a module you can choose how specific the keying must be when a module is inserted into a slot in the chassis See page 44 for details 119 Chapter6 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Custom Settings RSLogix 5000 programming softwate automatically creates module defined data types and tags when a module is created This section describes how to Modify Default modif the dead configuration Configuration Data types symbolically name module configuration input and output data Tags let you provide each a unique name such as where the user defined data type and slot reside on the controller This information is used to communicate data between the controller and module Follow these steps to modify a default configuration 1 On the New Module dialog box make sure Open Module Properties is checked and click OK E x Type 17554B15D 16 Point 10V 30V DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name Slot 1 a Description zl Comm Format Fun Diagnostics Input Data x Revision b3 fi 4 Electronic Keying Compatible Keying x v Open Module Properties Cancel Help The
311. rimessi raene td REIR ERSTE Een O iput MOOUe Ses ctae a OE dod pared s S E Grac REA Connec dos i as coda weld ane oo oa Ut EeePC pO did ud Ditect Connections ereti iorri eic eer d Fe imet en fud Race GUnBecHOe uoce aser aire p ACD RNC RE Rat are gh Suggestions for Rack Connection Usage 0005 Input Module Operation aie tax PepDCC Por oe hee oe Na Input Modules in a Local Chassis cere e Ree x Requested Packet Interval RPT 2 4a eRooocc eR exe Change ot State COS os scena 3 eR x Rire Ed K EE e a Triest vent ASKS o cu eite oet bo Pal dc ES pts ataab d Input Modules in a Remote Chassts4 2s ek o ee e Ra Remote Input Modules Connected Via the Control Net Network e eres Ya PVPREUEEERIY qe MER UE Remote Input Modules Connected Via the EtherNet IP Network eee Output Module Operated by cue qi ine beerstetai e ata EE So e es Output Modules in a Local Chassis 0 00 cece ee eee Output Modules in a Remote Chassis eese Remote Output Modules Connected Via the Control Net Network creta emo Ee RE NS be Ia Remote Output Modules Connected Via the EtherNet IP Network eee Listeti o b Modes a 2v acce ev bee dw Rh ev wA V EE P E Multiple Owners of Input Modules ees coe eret Configuration Changes in an Input Module with Multiple Owners Table of Contents ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 TOEEOGIICHOE e esf ettet
312. rmation for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 IV32 Attribute Temperature operating IE IE IE C 60 C 60 C 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 1V32 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IE IE IE C 60 C 60 C 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges IE C 61 Radiated RF immunity 000 4 3 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 0V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz 0V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 0V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 1890
313. rminals and 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators for outputs Isolated with 24V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output Isolated 240V AC DC with four terminals per output Isolated with extra terminals and 120V AC blown fuse indicators Isolated with 120V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output Isolated with 240V AC DC blown fuse indicators and four terminals per output FM40F F24AD 4 module 6 pts or less Extender cable is provided 3 One 1492 XIM24 16RF module is to be used with one 1492 XIM4024 16R or 1492 XIM4024 16RF master 32 pt only Appendix G Pre wired Cable 1492 CABLExY x cable length ate leakage current exceeding 0 5 mA Use a 1492 IFM20D120N or 1492 IFM20D120A 2 module OF FS24A 4 module and the 1492 CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756 IB16D module However due to the 1492 IFM40F FS24A 4 module s blown fuse leakage current rating the wire off diagnostic function of the 1756 IB16D module will not indicate a blown or removed fuse as a wire off condition If you require this nction for a blown or removed fuse you must use a 1492 ude of current through the status indicator the 1756 OB16D module no load diagnostic function The 1492 IFM40F FS24 2 and 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 modules and the 1492 CABLExY cable can be used with the 1756 OB16D module However due to the 1492 IFMAOF FS24 2 and 1492 IFM40F FS24 4 module s blown fuse leakage curr
314. ro 9 CD OUT 4 N O Vy O DC 4 f d 5 L1 5 eun OUT 5 N O L1 6 eu 13 80 DU 6 N O Jumper Bar L1 7 16 15 ep OUT 7 N O Cut to Length 8 G lis 171 OUT 8 N O L1 9 D20 199 OUT 9 N O L1 10 glz n OUT 10 N O L1 11 Qiza 23 OUT 11 N O H Additional jumper bars may be purchased e L1 12 E026 25 EDT OU FINE A by using catalog number 1756 JMPR TS L1 13 I 28 27 OUT 13 N O L1 14 1G j 30 29 4 OUT 14 N O Li 15 D s2 31 DL our 15N 0 l u O 11 15 LIED 34 33 DT Not Used Used CD 3e 35 Not Used f Y L2 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 OW16l Attribute 1756 0W16l Ca RELAY QUTPU Outputs 16 N O individually isolated 3 UL module rating UL C300 R150 ST01234567 K Operating voltage range 5 125V DC ST 8 9 1011 1213 1415 8 10 240V AC Contact current rating 2A Q 5 30V DC 0 5 A Q 48V DC 0 25 A Q 125V DC 2 A Q 125 240V AC Output delay time OFF to ON 0 ms max ON to OFF 0 ms max Current draw 5 1V 50 mA Current draw 24V 50 mA Power dissipation max 4 5 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 5 35 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max 5 mA per point Initial contact resistance max 00 mQ Switching frequency max operation 3 s 0 3 Hz at rated load Bounce time mean 2ms Expected contact life 300 K cycles resistive 00 K cycles inductive Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Technical Specifications 1756 0W161 Attribute Iso
315. roller were in Program 1756 OB161l mode or Fault mode 1756 OB16lS See page 82 for more information 1756 0B32 1756 0B8 1756 OB8 1756 OB8EI 1756 0C8 1756 0616 1756 0H8l 1756 ON8 1756 OV32E 1756 0W161 1756 0X8l 1756 OA8E only Field power loss detection See page 92 Diagnostic latching See page 74 125 Chapter6 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Configure a Di agnostic The table lists the ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules and the features that can be configured Input Module 3d Input Modules Configured Features Description 1756 IA8D Change of state See page 78 1756 IA16D Input filter times See page 79 Open wire detection See page 80 Field power loss detection See page 81 Diagnostic latching See page 74 Diagnostic change of state See page 78 For more information on how to reset Latched Diagnostics see page 129 Configure a Di agnostic The table lists the ControlLogix diagnostic digital output modules and the features that can be configured Output Module i Input Modules Configured Features Description 1756 0A8D Output state in Program See page 82 mode 1756 0B16D Output state in Fault mode Transition from Program state to Fault state No load detection See page 86 Diagnostic latching See page 74 Output verify detection See page 87 1756 OA8D only Field power loss detection See page 92 126 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P
316. ropean Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http Awww ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 139 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 1A161 ControlLogix AC 79 132V isolated input module 140 amp ACINPUT 981012345670 ST 89 10111213 1415K Simplified Schematic Isolated ai Wiring 12 0 o L2 0 2 1 8 0 o Qo 0 ud 24 la 3 N o L2 g d F 12 2 L2 l6 5 i y um I c J 9 2 2 SA e N2 o o u2 2 V AT K L2 3 e 8 7 e 3 er 0t mE U4 o 24 Tepe og jM o o
317. rrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m with 200 Hz 5096 Pulse 10096 AM Q 1890 MHz 3V m with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 2000 2700 MHz EFT B immunity 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 0G16 Certification 1756 0G16 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Eq CSA Certified Process Control Eq LR69960C ipment See CSA File LR54689C uipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File CE EN 61326
318. rs See FaultValue 0 Use FaultValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State FaultValue Configuration Fault Value Used in conjunction with FaultMode to configure the state of 1 bit per point outputs when a communications fault occurs See FaultMode 0 Off On FieldPwrLoss Configuration Field Power Loss Enables Field Power Loss diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable NoLoadEn Configuration No Load Enables No Load diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable OutputVerifyEn Configuration Output Verify Enables Output Verify diagnostic 1 bit per point 0 Disable 1 Enable ProgMode 1 bit per point Configuration Program Mode Used in conjnunction with ProgValue to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program mode See ProgValue 0 Use ProgValue Off or On 1 Hold Last State ProgValue 1 bit per point Configuration Program Value Used in conjunction with ProgMode to configure the state of outputs when the controller is in Program mode See ProgMode 0 Off 2 On ProgToFaultEn 1 byte per module Configuration Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communication failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs will remain in Program mode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode FaultValue 0 Outputs stay in
319. rsion 10 and later after you choose a Service Type RSLogix 5000 software fills in most of the fields listed above The fields you must fill in are dependent on what Service Type you choose For example with the Reset Electronic Fuse service you must know only the Source Element and the Destination The following section shows how to configure messages with RSLogix 5000 software version 10 and later A table describes the relationship of the fields in both dialog boxes so you can configure messages by using RSLogix 5000 software version 9 and earlier 264 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C Configuration Tab The Configuration tab provides information on what module service to perform and where to perform it RSLogix 5000 Software Version 9 and Farlier RSLogix 5000 Software Version 10 and Later Message Configuration Slot4_Ch0_Reset_Fuse x ES Configuration Communication Configuration Communication Tag Message Type CIP Generic Message Type o Generic Y SENEC Reset Electronic Fuse Source Elementi Slot Ch Reset Fu v i Hex 7 Slot4_ChO_Reset_Fuse ype Service Code fad Hex Source ChO_ t x ENG MF EINER Object Type I e Hex Num Df Elements 1 Bytes Reg 4d Hex Class fie Hex Destination Local 4 C x Object ID fi Destination fLocat4 C z Tees fl Attibute o INE New Tag Objec
320. rtificates and other certification details 172 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 1756 IV16 ControlLogix DC 10 30V sourcing input module 1756 IV16 Simplified Schematic m Elo gt DC 0 j i z N 3 i i N 2 IN j ad gt EE _ Group 0 B a Group 0 i EE Y K N 5 H 1 N 4 i i Ff NI Id e ws ControlLogix Display DC 0 ig i DC 0 Backplane 1 Interface N 9 I 1 N 8 eese ud KD KD N 11 e d N 10 16 15 N 13 N 12 Group 1 1 17 N 15 ig ie N 14 0 g DC 1 A E DC 1 7 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 IV16 amp DCINPUT Attribute 1756 IV16 3 Inputs 16 8 points group ST012345670 TB89DTRBUBK Voltage category 12 24V DC source 8 Operating voltage range 10 30V DC Input voltage nom 24V DC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 280 us nom 1 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 540 us nom 2 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 110 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation
321. s and module specific information Chapter 3 and page 233 1756 OV32E module Features and module specific information Chapter 3 Using electronic keying with examples of Exact Match Compatible and Disabled Keying Chapter 7 New digital 1 0 specifications Appendix F Requirements for firmware updates for Major Revision 3 x Appendix G Updated information on Interface Modules IFMs and pre wired cables that are available with digital 1 0 modules Summary of Changes Notes 4 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Preface What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Table of Contents Documentation Revision 0 0 ccc es New InfortHatiOng z ceci E e hte ES EU REL Su tas TOtFOQUCLOD corone et tete tte Ut m ente Saar etn cis ae eres esas Who Should Use This Manual 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee eens Additional Resources 0 ccc cece n Chapter 1 IntrOduchOne cau eerte ete Ie Oe ah Ga Td Available Beatuteszi ace eet ea lace ede v e RR ec e ad I O Module in the ControlLogix System lleeeeeeee Module Identification and Status Information Chapter 2 Hitt OdUCHO cron pee pP OF PERRI DAP OS O LSE See corte Ownership MMC TI PM Use RSNetWorx and RSLogix 5000 Software 000 Internal Module Operations i03 cea DO o ERE ys Input Modules
322. s found on the 1756 OA8E only When field power to the module is lost ot zero ctoss cannot be detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted IMPORTANT Only enable Field Power Loss detection for points that are in use If this feature is enabled for points that are not in use you will receive faults for those points during operation Follow these steps to enable diagnostics for field power loss 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 3 1756 OABE 3 1 Diagnostics Backplane Enable Diagnostics for Enable Diag Field Power Loss Latching Vv Vv Vv Vv Vv M M Vv Communications Failure If communications fail in Leave outputs in Program Mode state Program Mode Change outputs to Fault Mode state Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the Enable Diagnostics for Field Power Loss column Click a box to enable field power loss detection for a specific point Clear the check mark to disable field loss detection 3 Click OK Diagnostic Latch of Information For the standard digital I O modules the diagnostic latch feature is found on the 1756 OA8E module only Diagnostic latching allows this module to latch a fault in the set position once it has been triggered even if the error condition causing the fault to occur disappeats 65 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard
323. s open When an Open Wire condition 1s detected a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point fault This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 Follow these steps to configure open wire detection 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab E Module Properties Local 1 1756 IB16D 3 1 General Connection Module Ino Configuration Diagnostics Backplane TATAA oa oa Vo Via Oaa 1A 0 1 2 3 4 5 B ie 8 WATVWIATA Aa M Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions Status Offline Cancel Apply Help 2 Do one of the following in the Open Wire middle column Click a box to enable the open wire detection for a specific point Clear the check mark to disable open wire detection 3 Click OK Field power Loss Detection on Input Modules For the diagnostic input modules field power loss detection is found on the 1756 IA8D module only When field power to the module is lost a point level fault is sent to the controller to identify the exact point faulted You should enable field power loss detection only for points that are in use This feature has a corresponding tag that can be examined in the user program in the event of a fault For more information on these tags see
324. s within the motor starter Motor starter uses 120V AC range 282 1756 0A161 operates in a 74 120V AC voltage range Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Number of Motor Starters to be Used Step 6 Confirm the inrush current per point Motor Starters for Digital I O Modules Appendix E Value used in this example Inrush of motor starter Line voltage Inrush current 1225VA 120V AC 10 2 A Inrush 7 Confirm the steady state point current of the module can drive the motor starter Sealed Line voltage Steady state current 45VA 120V AC 0 375 A 50 C 122 F Output point current can drive 2 A 033 mA x 10 C 2A 0 33 A 1 67 A 50 C 122 F Above 30 C 86 F output point derates to 033 mA C point derating The 1756 0A161 output point current 1 67A can drive the motor starter 0 375 A 50 C 122 F 8 Confirm the 1756 OA16I A total module current can drive 12 size 3 motor starters 50 C 122 F Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Motor starter steady state current x 11 motor starters 375 x 12 2 4 5A 50 C 122 F The output total module current can drive 5A 033 mA x 10 x C 2 5A 0 33 A 4 67 A 50 C 122 F Above 30 C 86 F total output current derates to 033 mA x C Module derating The 1756 OA161 total output current 4 67A can drive the 12 motor starters 4 5 A 50 C 122 F 283 Appendix E Motor Start
325. sion 2 Compliance 0000 0 eee 74 UL CSA FM CE C Tick EEx T V Agency Approvals 74 Diagnostic Latch of Information ceca ber veed evi vba ues 74 Diagnostic Limestamp as sse de GbR PESE REN ERDEEES 75 Point AC I6 Pott DC e Meas etit obse VU ded eaters 75 Point level Fault Reportage ico e ies Rb ER EX d den eo edd 76 Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 78 Diagnostic Change of State for Input Modules 78 Software Configurable Filter Times occ 03 8G rms 79 Isolated and Non Isolated Varieties of Modules 80 Multiple Input Point Densities od eas ve vee ds kee ee 80 Open Wit Detection 1 scq eod OR tiene e ex KS ua 80 Field power Loss Detection on Input Modules 81 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 82 Configurable Point level Output Fault States iesu 82 OQ tp t Data Echos ni oue xau Bee gree ile epe dace e ed 83 Field Wiring OBCOBS oae und cp bes ilcu added Live tuts aie 84 Multiple Output Point Densitieso s cvs dauce ere xr os 84 Flectronic Fusing ceon iian EDO AU UC BOE RUE ERN 85 No Lo d Iietecti ot scone exem Rule wn oe Medeae 86 Field side Output Verification 24 desk es erat dale ea d 87 P lse Testen erbe e ette te EE Re REM ts 89 Point level Electronic Fusing x o by e ELE REREEEESUER 91 Field power Loss Detection on Output Modules 92 Diagnostic Change of State for Output Modules
326. size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 OB8l Attrib ute Temperature operating IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock 1756 0OB8l 0 60 C 32 140 F Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F IEC 60 IEC 60 IEC 60 Temperature storage 068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold 068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat 068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock 40 85 C 40 185 F Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2 g Q 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50 g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine wave 80 AM from 80 2000 MHz IEC 61000 4 3 10V m with 200 Hz 50 Pulse 100 AM 900 MHz 10V m w
327. solated Varieties of Output Modules 62 Multiple Output Point Densities cake gees eret 62 Electronic Fusing sexy E Rer ER ee dees ed ipta 62 Field Power Loss Detectotou ease ee PET ae E ERE GR Oe 65 Diagnostic Latch of Information 00000000 65 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Conreolletses avid a ones actu ees Sie Meee i Nei pe ul 66 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules AN Controllers as cssc iit a e Rare Y eae UE tra quara Bets 67 Chapter 4 LtrOGR CHIOT au paas eS Aron Sc Mak ORE qe od acero ae Mte oat ele ack Rane Rana 69 Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 0004 69 Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 0 0 70 Features on ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Modules 70 Features Common to ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital I O Modules 71 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 71 Module Fault Reporting uly ceux y ORE S E ERE es 71 Software onfipnrable uos aad Sie ato i uu Cease ife 72 Publication 1756 UMO58E EN P August 2010 Install the ControlLogix 1 0 Module Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Table of Contents Electronic Keying scu aeuo gos EY VER WEEDS PON datei itis 72 Module Inhibiting accuse etsi x ran Er ae C TON 12 Use the System Clock to Timestamp Inputs Schedule Outputs 72 Producer Consumer Model lee 73 Status Indicator Information 0 0 0 0 cece eee 73 Pull Class I Divi
328. srupted and may result in a loss of data Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital I O Module Features Chapter 3 Module Inhibiting Module inhibiting lets you indefinitely suspend a connection between an owner controller and a digital I O module without having to remove the module from the configuration This process lets you temporarily disable communication to a module such as to perform maintenance You can do this by the following ways You write configuration for an I O module but inhibit the module to prevent it from communicating with the owner controller In this case the owner does not establish a connection and configuration is not sent to the module until the connection is uninhibited In your application a controller already owns a module has downloaded configuration to the module and is currently exchanging data over the connection between the devices In this case you can inhibit the module and the owner controller behaves as if the connection to the module does not exist IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters the Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs go to zero 0 during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will go to zero 0 The following examples are instances where you may need to use module inhibiting
329. ssage instruction TIP Consider the following when using the pulse test Only use the test when the output state does not transition for long periods of time Normal diagnostics will catch faults if the outputs are transitioning regularly e When first performing the pulse test it is recommended that you verify the load will not transition You should be at the actual load while the test is performed The table explains how a pulse test can be used to perform a preemptive diagnosis of possible future module conditions Topic Description Detect a blown fuse The Blown Fuse diagnostic see page 85 for a complete before it happens explanation can be used only when an output module is in the On state But it would be useful to be made aware when operating conditions for a module may cause a blown fuse If you perform a pulse test on the module while the output is in the Off state the output point is commanded to be On briefly Although no diagnostic bits are set in the output data echo the pulse test reports a failure because conditions when the point is On indicate a blown fuse condition may occur see Point level Fault Reporting on page 76 IMPORTANT The pulse test does not guarantee a fuse will blow when the output point turns On It merely indicates this condition is possible Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 89 Chapter4 Controllogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Topic Detect a No
330. st 2010 Troubleshoot Your Module Appendix A Status Indicators for Output Modules Indicator Status Description OK Steady green The outputs are actively being controlled by a system processor OK Flashing green The module has passed internal diagnostics but is not actively controlled or it is inhibited or controller is in Program mode Uninhibit connection establish connection or transition controller to Run mode to enable communication to module OK Flashing red Previously established communication has timed out Check the controller and chassis communication OK Steady red The module must be replaced Replace the module 1 0 State Yellow The output is active 1 0 Fuse Red A short overload fault has occurred for a point in this group Check the wiring for a short overload Also check the Module Properties dialog box in RSLogix 5000 software and reset the fuse 1 0 Fault Red A fault has occurred for this point Check this point at the controller 245 Appendix A 1 0 Fuse 246 1756 0A16 amp AC OUTPUT 8 ST 02 3 498 9 FUSE K ST 891011121314 15 FUSE 1756 0A8D N amp AC OUTPUT i ST 01234587 AT 01234567 K 6 DIAGNOSTIC 1756 0B16E 1756 0V16E amp DCOUTPUT 3 S 01234567 FUSE e p ST 8 910 1112 13 1415 6 FUSE ELECTRONICALLY
331. t min 1756 0B8 3 mA per point Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 756 TBNH 756 TBSH Slot width Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 2 North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 0B8 Attribute 1756 0B8 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature storage IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unp
332. t 10 31 2 DC Input Allen Bradley 1756 IB32 B 32 Point 10 31 2 DC Input Allen Bradley 1756 IC16 16 Point 30 60 DC Input Allen Bradley 1756 IG16 A 16 Point O 5 5VDC TTL Input Allen Bradley ml gt Add Favorite By Category Favorites OK Cancel Help 3 Select a module and click OK 4 Click OK to accept the default major revision Select Major Revision BN xi Select major revision for new 1756 IB16D module being created Major Revision Jane Cancel Help TIP To find the revision number open RSLinx software Click the RSWho icon 5l and choose the network Open the module and then right click the module to choose Properties in the pull down menu The revision number is among the properties Publication 1756 UM058E EN P August 2010 115 Chapter6 Configure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules The New Module dialog box appeats New Module XI Type 1756 IB16D 16 Point 10 30 DC Diagnostic Input Vendor Allen Bradley Parent Local Name Local diagnostic input Slot f i Description zl Comm Format Fui Diagnostics Input Data gt Revision p a Electronic Keying Compatible Keying v Open Module Properties Cancel Help 5 In the Name box type a module name 6 In the slot box enter the module s slot number 7 In the Description box type an optional description for the module 8 From the Comm Format pull down menu choose a communication format
333. t 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Suppott for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone en html Canada or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility Howevet if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us setve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rock
334. t Attribute Hex Create Tag Q Enable 2 Enable Waiting Start Done Done Lenath 0 Eror Code ail oclo Enable Enable waiting Start Done Done Length 0 Error Code Extended Error Code Timed Out Error Path Extended Error Code Error Text Cancel Amy _ Hep E ae Heb The following table explains the relationship of the fields in the above dialog boxes For example despite different entry fields both screen examples are configured to send a message to reset an electronic fuse module service on Channel 0 of a 1756 OA8D module where to perform the service Relationship of Message Configuration Parameters RSLogix 5000 Versions 9 and earlier RSLogix 5000 Versions 10 and later Description Service Code Defines the type of module service to be performed For example a reset Service Type Note In versions 10 and later you can use a pull down menu to choose the Service Type RSLogix 5000 software defaults the Service Code Instance Class and Attribute parameters based on the Service Type that you choose All values are in Hex Object that you are sending a message to such as the device object or a discrete output point Object Type Class Each object can have multiple instances For example a discrete output can have 16 points or instances of where a message can be sent This specifies the instance Object ID Instance Further identifies the exact a
335. t modules convert AC or DC On Off signals from user devices to appropriate logic level for use within the processor Typical input devices include proximity switches imit switches selector switches float switches push button switches 40 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Output Module Compatibility Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 When designing a system that uses ControlLogix input modules you must consider the voltage necessary for your application whether you need a solid state device cuttent leakage if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix input modules see the I O Systems Overview publication CIG 2 1 ControlLogix output modules may be used to drive a vatiety of output devices Typical output devices compatible with the ControlLogix outputs include motor starters solenoids indicatots Follow these guidelines when designing a system Make sure that the ControlLogix outputs can supply the necessary surge and continuous current for proper operation Make sure that the surge and continuous current are not exceeded Damage to the module could result When sizing output loads check the documentation supplied with the output device for the surge and continuous current needed to
336. t verification On state detection only Pulse test Configurable max pulse width Time stamp of diagnostics 1 ms Technical Specifications 1756 0B16D Attribute 1756 0B16D Outputs 16 diagnostic 8 points group Voltage category 24V DC source Operating voltage range 19 2 30V DC Output delay time OFF to ON 60 us nom 1 ms max ON to OFF 630 uis nom 5 ms max Current draw 5 1V 250 mA 203 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 0B16D Attribute 1756 0B16D Current draw 24V 40 mA Power dissipation max 3 3 W 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation max 1 25 BTU hr Off state leakage current per point max mA per poin On state voltage drop max IN DC 2A Current per point max 2 A Q 30 C 86 F linear derating A 60 C 140 F linear derating Current per module max 8A Q 30 C 86 F linear derating 4A Q 60 C 140 F linear derating Surge current per point 4 A for 10 ms per point repeatable every 1 s Load current min 3 mA per poin Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output group to group No isolation between individual group outputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3
337. tEn 1 byte per module Configuration Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Program to Fault Transition Diagnostic enables the transition of outputs to FaultMode if a communications failure occurs in Program mode Otherwise outputs will remain in Program mode See ProgMode ProgValue FaultMode FaultValue 0 Outputs stay in Program mode if comm failure 1 Outputs go to FaultMode if comm failure 253 Appendix B Tag Definitions Standard Output Module Input Data Tags Name Configuration or I O Data Definition CSTTimestamp Input data Coordinated System Time Timestamp Timestamp of diagnostic input 8 bytes data including fusing see BlownFuse NoLoad OutputVerifyFault FieldPwrLoss which is updated whenever a diagnostic fault occurs or goes away Data Input data Data Off On status for the output point ECHOED back from the output 1 bit per point module This is used to verify proper communication only No field side verification is done For field side verification see OutputVerifyFault 0 Off 2 On Fault Input data This is an ordered status of faults that indicates a point is faulted and I 0 data 1 bit per point for that point may be incorrect Check other diagnostic faults if they are available for further diagnosis of the root cause If communication to the input module is lost then all points for the module will be faulted 0 No fault 1 Fault FuseBlown NoLoad OutputVerify
338. ta echo 32 61 83 fault states ware 82 online services 129 verification diagnostic output modules 87 verify word diagnostic output modules 96 ownership 19 controller I O module relationship 19 direct connection 24 input remote connections 29 Listen only 24 35 multiple owners of input modules 35 output remote connections 33 rack connection 24 optimization 24 26 P point level fault reporting diagnostic modules 76 producer consumer network model 13 27 32 73 pulse test diagnostic output modules 89 usage tips 89 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 configuring in RSLogix 5000 soft Index rack connection usage recommendations 26 optimization 24 26 remote chassis configuring remote I O modules 128 input modules 29 output modules 33 Removable Terminal Block RTB 14 16 99 installing 107 mechanically keying the RTB 99 removing 108 using with the housing 104 wiring the RTB 100 Removal and Insertion Under Power RIUP 43 71 requested packet interval RPI 27 93 retrieving module ID information 17 retrieving module status 17 RPI setting 56 RSLogix 5000 software configuring I O modules 20 43 using with RSNetWorx software 20 RSNetWorx software transferring data establishing a NUT 20 using with RSLogix 5000 software 20 S scheduled outputs 72 spring clamp RTB 102 status indicators 16 55 73 status reporting diagnostic input modules 93 output modules 95 standard input modules 66 out
339. te and a timestamp occurs scheduled an output point will actuate at some configured time in the future outputs You can schedule outputs up to 16 seconds into the future When you use timestamping of inputs and scheduled outputs you must choose a Communication Format for each input and output module that allows timestamping See Communication Format for more information have a controller in the same rack as both I O modules e disable Change of State for all input points on the input module except the point being timestamped TIP For scheduled outputs to work most effectively remember the following items The time to schedule outputs to transition in the future must account for any controller backplane and network delays The 1 0 modules must reside in the same rack as the time master Time scheduled Output Control Time scheduled output control is a feature available on the first eight outputs of the 1756 OB16IS module only By using the time scheduled output control feature the module can turn the outputs On or Off at a specific CST time You can set the time setpoint in 100 us increments for the output to turn On or Off in the application program The 1756 OB16IS module manages the time locally as such that the output is turned On or Off at the time specified MAOC Instructions with Time scheduled Output Control The Motion Axis Output Cam MAOC instruction provides position based control
340. tecrisobes z Show Show All z Sort raa Name j 2 Value 48 1756_D1 0 0 TEST Teen AB1755 DH do fese WHO Lufounekiu WHO vendor L60001 Hex INT E i WH product type 7 Deoma INT m wHO preduct code 2 Decima INT Pt egress 2 Decimal SINT B WHO min revision 3 Decind SINT E tH WHLI staius ZSUUUU_UUUU_L Binay INI BHIWHO serial number 16 0000_0baf Hea DINT FR WHO sting lergh 32 Decima SINT E E3 WHO accii sting TET 1 Hex SINT 22 W HO_Inlomation NERA eee Hex SINT 48 Eho msc Tu Quen MESSAGE bai T mE 215 Appendix C Use Ladder Logic To Perform Run Time Services and Reconfiguration You do not have to create the user defined data structure If you choose not to create this structure you can use the ASCII string and String length to retrieve and understand module identification through some interface excluding RSLogix 5000 software The illustration shows an example WHO ladder logic application who msg EN MS j Type OP Geretic Message Corel 1 Copy Fils Copy File I 31 Source WHO_Inteematior 2 Source WHO_Intoimatior 4 Des WHO product_bpe Jest WHO producl_code Lerighh 2 Lengih 2 COP COP Copy File Copy File Source WHO _Inlamaorf Source WHO_Inlomalior Dee WHO major_revizion Ded WHO minor revision Leriglh 1 Lenglh LUP Copy File r3 Souice WHO Infomatior t Det WHO status Length 2 iP rnp 4
341. that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures ELM A A A A Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Rockwell Software Logix5000 RSLogix 5000 RSLogix RSLogix ControlLogix RSNetWorx RSNetWorx for ControlNet RSLinx PowerFlex 700S Data Highway Plus and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Introduction Documentation Revision New Information Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Summary of Changes This release of this document contains updated information and specifications for ControlLogix digital I O modules This document supersedes the C version of 1756 UM058 EN P The D version was not available to the public New information is marked by change bars in the side column as shown to the right Section Module Information Chapter 2 and page 29 Information for scheduling I O modules on the ControlNet network and setting up 1 0 modules to trigger event based tasks Chapter 3 and page 143 1756 IA32 module Features and module specific information Chapter 3 and page 161 1756 IG16 module Features and module specific information Chapter 3 and page 200 1756 OB8l module Features and module specific information Chapter 3 and page 212 1756 OB16IS module Features and module specific information Chapter 3 and page 221 1756 0616 module Feature
342. thin the last 25 ms TIP Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 For more information see the Guidelines to Specify an RPI Rate for O Modules section in the Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual publication 1756 RM094 31 Chapter2 Digital 1 0 Operation in the ControlLogix System Output Module Operation Output Modules in a Local Chassis 32 An owner controller sends output data to an output module when either one of two things occur at the end of every one of its tasks local chassis only at the rate specified in the module s RPI When an output module physically resides in a remote chassis with respect to the owner controller the ownet controller sends data to the output module only at the RPI rate specified for the module Updates ate not performed at the end of the ownet controller s tasks Whenever the module receives data from the controller it immediately multicasts the output commands it received to the rest of the system The actual output data is echoed by the output module as input data and multicast back out onto the network This is called Output Data Echo IMPORTANT In this Producer Consumer model the output module is the consumer of the controller s output data and the producer of the data echo The ownet controller updates ControlLogix digital output modules in the local chassis at the end of every task and at the RPI When you specify an RPI value for a digit
343. tion data the data received and accepted from the first controller If the configuration data sent by the second controller matches the data sent by the first controller that connection is also accepted If any parameter of the second configuration data is different from the first the module rejects the connection and the user is informed by an error in the software or programatically via a ladder logic program The advantage of multiple owners over a Listen mode connection is that now either of the controllers can break the connection to the module and the module will continue to operate and multicast data to the system because of the connection maintained by the other controller You must be careful when changing an input module s configuration data in a multiple owner scenario When the configuration data is changed in one of the owners for example Controller A and sent to the module that configuration data is accepted as the new configuration for the module Controller B will continue to listen unaware that any changes have been made in the module s behavior as illustrated below gt A 9 Input a B Jnitial Configuration E 4 EE a Input Module Configuration Data 9 A B XXXXX B Xxxxx e XXXXX 4 41057 IMPORTANT A pop up screen in
344. tion max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTPUT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V ms for loads under 50 mA The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 500 mA OUTPUT to L2 is 4V ms maximum If the commutating dv dt rating of the TRIAC is exceeded the TRIAC could latch on If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 10 50 mA range a resistor may be added AC ross the output and L2 The purpose of this resistor is to increase the total output current to 50 mA I V R At 50 mA and above the module has a higher commutating dv dt rating When adding a resistor for the output to L2 be sure it is rated for the power that it will dissipate P V 2 R If the commutating dv dt rating is exceeded in the 50 500 mA range the L1 AC waveform could be at fault Be sure the waveform is a good sinusoid void of any anomalies such as distorted or flattened sections 7 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE V Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 0N8 Attribute 1756 0N8 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Op
345. troller Diagnostic change of state Output module sends data when any change in the diagnostics output point occurs Unlike diagnostic input modules this feature cannot be disabled for diagnostic output modules There is no Enable Change of State for Diagnostic Transitions box at the bottom of the Configuration tab to check or uncheck for diagnostic output modules ControlLogix diagnostic digital input modules multicast fault and status data to any owner listening controllers All diagnostic input modules maintain a module fault word the highest level of fault reporting Some modules also use additional words to indicate fault conditions The following table lists the tags that can be examined in ladder logic to indicate when a fault has occurred for a diagnostic input module Tag Description Module fault Word This word provides fault summary reporting It s tag name is Fault This word is available on all digital input modules Field Power Loss Word This word indicates loss of field power to a group on the module It s tag name is FieldPwrLoss This word is available on 1756 IA8D only See Field power Loss Detection on Input Modules on page 81 for more information Open Wire Word This word indicates the loss of a wire from a point on the module It s tag name is OpenWire See Open Wire Detection on page 80 for more information All words are 32 bit although only the number of bits appropriate fo
346. ty 4 kV at 5 kHz on signal ports IEC 61000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV line line DM and 2 kV line earth CM on signal ports IEC 61000 4 5 Conducted RF immunity 10V rms with 1 kHz sine wave 8096 AM from 150 kHz 80 MHz IEC 61000 4 6 Certifications 1756 IN16 Certification 1756 IN16 UL UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment certified for US and Canada See UL File E65584 CSA CSA Certified Process Control Equipment See CSA File LR54689C CSA Certified Process Control Equipment for Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File LR69960C CE European Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with e EN 61326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements EN 61000 6 2 Industrial Immunity EN 61000 6 4 Industrial Emissions EN61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B European Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements Il 3 G Ex nA IIC T3 X FM FM Approved Equipment for use in Class Division 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Ce
347. types of isolation available with ControlLogix input modules are channel to channel isolation and no isolation Yout application determines what type of isolation is necessary and which input module to use Multiple Input Point Densities ControlLogix input modules use either 8 16 or 32 point densities for greater flexibility in your application A point is the termination where a wire attaches to the input module from a field device The module receives information from the device to this designated point thus signaling when activity occurs 59 Chapter3 Controllogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Features Specific to The ein E in this section are available on all ControlLogix digital Standard Output Modules 7 77 Configurable Point Level Output Fault States Individual outputs can be independently configured to unique fault states either On Off or Hold in case of a communication failure or Program mode IMPORTANT Whenever you inhibit an output module it enters the Program mode and all outputs change to the state configured for the Program mode For example if an output module is configured so that the state of the outputs turn off during Program mode whenever that module is inhibited the outputs will turn off Follow these steps to enable a fault state 1 On the Module Properties dialog box click the Configuration tab Wil Module Properties Local 1 1756 OA8 3 1 General Connection Module Info Confi
348. uires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 1C16 Attribute 1756 1C16 Temperature operating 0 60 C 32 140 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ad Operating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bd Operating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Nb Operating Thermal Shock Temperature surrounding air 60 C 140 F Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F IEC 60068 2 1 Test Ab Unpackaged Nonoperating Cold IEC 60068 2 2 Test Bb Unpackaged Nonoperating Dry Heat IEC 60068 2 14 Test Na Unpackaged Nonoperating Thermal Shock Relative humidity 5 95 noncondensing IEC 60068 2 30 Test Db Unpackaged Nonoperating Damp Heat Vibration 2g 10 500 Hz IEC 60068 2 6 Test Fc Operating Shock operating 30g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Shock nonoperating 50g IEC 60068 2 27 Test Ea Unpackaged Shock Emissions CISPR 11 Group 1 Class A ESD immunity 6 kV contact discharges IEC 61000 4 2 8 kV air discharges Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 159 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Environmental Specifications 1756 116 Attribute 1756 116 Radiated RF immunity 10V m with 1 kHz sine
349. ult appears in the Off state until the point During normal operating conditions hardware damage should not be possible An output shorted to L2 may temporarily cause a hardware point fault See output shorted to L2 as a possible cause Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 4 1756 0B16D Diagnostic Fault Table Ladder commands output to be On 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 Fuse Blown bit is set The following table lists possible diagnostic faults on the 1756 OB16D module Ladder commands output to be Off 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as ort 2 Pulse Test fails Possible cause of fault Output is shorted to GND 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On 2 Pulse Test fails 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 No Load bit is set 3 Pulse Test passes One of the following could be the cause 1 No Load 2 Output shorted to DC 3 No power at module 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as On 2 Output Verify sets a bit 9 1 The electronic protection of this module has been desi 1 Output Data Echo returns the state of the output as Off 2 Pulse Test fails gned to provide protection for the module from short circu Hardware point damage it conditions The protection is
350. un Time Services and Reconfiguration Appendix C When you are using RSLogix 5000 software versions 9 and earlier some services require multiple parameters and tags in the Source and Destination fields An example is Pulse Test These services use copy instructions to move multiple tags to and from the message instruction source and destination tags The following table lists the copy instruction parameters needed for these services Copy Instruction Parameters for Module Services Required for RSLogix 5000 Software Versions 9 and Earlier Source Destination Tag in MSG Instruction Pulse Test Parameters SINT 10 Description Determines which point to perform the pulse test on Each bit corresponds to a point Only test one point at a time Copy Instruction COP This instruction moves data to from generic source destination buffers Source Enable 32 points DINT Destination Pulse Test Parameters 0 Length bytes 4 Determines maximum pulse width of the pulse test in milliseconds Pulse test inverts state of the output up to the maximum specified time Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 2 ms that is 20 Pulse Width INT Pulse Test Parameters 4 For AC modules only this specifies how long to delay after the zero cross before performing the pulse test Optimum time to perform pulse test is at its peak AC voltage Units are in 100 us increments Default tag value 4
351. urce Operating voltage range 0 30V DC Output delay time OFF to ON ms max ON to OFF 5 ms max Current draw 5 1V 65 mA Current draw 24V 2mA Power dissipation max 4 7 W Q 60 C 140 F 197 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 OB8EI Attribute 1756 OB8EI Thermal dissipation max 16 03 BTU hr E Off state leakage current max 0 5 mA per point On state voltage drop max 0 5V DC 892A Current per point max 2A Q 60 C 140 F Current per module max 16 A Q 60 C 140 F Surge current per point me ms each repeatable every 1 s 60 C Load current min 2mA Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output to output Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 1 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category information for planning conductor routing as described in the system level installation manual See the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Environmental Specifications 1756 OB8El
352. ure Your ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Output Module Communication Formats Data Return The owner controller sends the module only output data The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse is either blown or reset Communication Format CST timestamped fuse data output data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns fuse blown status with the value of the system clock from its local chassis when the fuse is either blown or reset CST timestamped fuse data scheduled output data This choice has the same definition as CST timestamped fuse data output data except that it is a listen only connection Listen only CST timestamped fuse data output data Chapter 6 Module 1756 0A16 OA8E OB16E OBBEI OV16E OV32E The owner controller sends the module only output data The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Full diagnostic output data The owner controller sends the module output data and a CST timestamp value The module returns diagnostic data and a timestamp of diagnostics Full diagnostics scheduled output data This choice has the same definition as Full diagnostics output data except that it is a listen only connection Listen only full diagnostics output data 1756 0A8D 0B16D The owner controlle
353. used output module 206 1756 OB161l 10 30V DC 16 point isolated output module 209 1756 OB16IS 10 30V DC scheduled isolated output module 212 1756 0B32 10 31 2V DC 32 point output module 215 1756 0C8 30 60V DC 8 point output module 218 1756 0616 Transitor transitor logic TTL output module 221 1756 0H81 90 146V DC 8 point isolated output module 224 1756 ON8 10 30V AC 8 point output module 227 1756 OV16E 10 30V DC 16 point e fused sinking current 230 output module 1756 OV32E 10 30V DC 32 point electronically fused sinking 233 current output module 1756 OW 16 10 265V 5 150V DC 16 point isolated 236 contact module 1756 OX8I 10 265V 5 150V DC 8 point isolated 239 contact module 15 Chapter 1 What Are ControlLogix Digital 1 0 Modules Parts Illustration of the ControlLogix Digital I O Module L r Item DC OUTPUT 3 J4 geqireeess Hs 6 Removable Terminal Block ET a re t e D e 9 D KO e N A Y e OOCOOOGGG5 080889898 lt 7 40200 M Description Backplane Connector Interface for the ControlLogix system that connects the module to the backplane Top and bottom guides Guides provide assistance in seating the RTB or
354. ustrial Emissions 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with EN6 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions Ex European Union 94 9 EC ATEX Directive compliant with EN 60079 15 Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Protection n EN 60079 0 General Requirements II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 X 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 235 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Display 1756 0W161l ControlLogix AC 10 240V DC 5 ControlLog Backplane Interface gt x lt 236 125V isolated contact module s eee z 1756 0W161 Simplified Schematic Isolated Wiring 24V uo o uo amp lz l ouro A o120 L1 L1 1 Dls 09 OUT 1 N O L2 0 112 le 5 0UT2N 0 y 022 l L1 3 9 8 79 OUT 3 N O T OUT DC 4 O 114 gp
355. uts have internal electronic or mechanical fusing to prevent too much current from flowing through the module This feature protects the module from electrical damage Other modules require external fusing You can reset an electronic fuse through RSLogix 5000 programming software or through ladder logic running on a controller For an example of how to reset an electronic fuse see Chapter 6 The following modules use electronic fusing e 1756 OA8E 1756 OB8EI 1756 OB16E 1756 OV16E 1756 OV32E Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 ControlLogix Standard Digital 1 0 Module Features Chapter 3 See the table to determine what fuse to use in your application Recommended Fuses Circuit Type Cat No Fusing on the module Recommended Fuse Supplier Fuse AC 1756 0A8 None Fused IFM can be used to 5x20mm SAN O Industry Corp protect outputs See publication 6 3A SOC p n 1492 TD008 9 Medium lag MT 4 6 3A 1756 OA8E 2 3 Yes Fused on a per point basis Electronically fused 1756 0A16 4 9 Yes Fused on a per group basis 5x20mm Littelfuse p n 3 15A H2153 15 Slo Blow 1500A Interruption current 1756 0A161 None Fused IFM can be used to 5xZ0mm SOC p n protect outputs See publication 6 3A MT 4 6 3A 1492 TD008 Medium lag 1756 ON8 None Fused IFM can be used to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 DC 1756 0Bg 8 None Fused IFM can be used to 5x20mm SOC p
356. vision 2 Group A B C D Hazardous Locations See CSA File CE European EN6 EN6 EN6 EN6 European EN6 Union 2004 108 IEC EMC Directive compliant with 326 1 Meas Control Lab Industrial Requirements 000 6 2 Industrial Immunity 000 6 4 Industrial Emi 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B Union 2006 95 EC LVD compliant with 131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 ssions C Tick Australian Radiocommunications Act compliant with AS NZS CISPR 11 Industrial Emissions 1 When marked See the Product Certification link at http www ab com for Declarations of Conformity Certificates and other certification details Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 145 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 IB16 ControlLogix DC 10 31 2V input module Simplified Schematic 1756 IB16 5V NA O ie io o o IN 0 i Group 0 EDI GND 0 5 Y K Daisy Chain 7 H C 2 A to Other N 5 IGS ie IN 4 Group 0 RTBs 7 GND i T D pod KB ControlLogix Display Backplane GND 0 ic ice ano Interface T f v DID m ot IN 1
357. well Automation Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core F Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Supersedes Publication 1756 UMO058C EN P March 2001 Copyright 2010 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
358. x filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 540 us nom 2 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 120 mA Current draw 24V 2 mA Power dissipation max 4 1 W 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 14 BTU hr 60 C 140 F Off state voltage max 5V Off state current max 1 5 mA On state current min 2mA On state current max 3 5mA Inrush current max 250 mA decaying to lt 37 in 22 ms without activation 176 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Technical Specifications 1756 1V32 Attribute Input impedance max 1756 1V32 8 6 kQ 30V DC Cyclic update time 200 us 750 ms Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type inputs to backplane and input group to group No isolation between individual group inputs Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 1 on signal ports North American temperature code T4A IEC temperature code T4 Enclosure type None open style 0 Maximum wire size requires extended housing catalog number 1756 TBE 2 Use this conductor category info
359. x 18 76 BTU hr Off state leakage current max 3 mA per point On state voltage drop max 1 5V peak 2 A 6V peak Q load current 50 mA Current per point max Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 2 A Q 30 86 F linear derating 1A Q 60 C 140 F linear derating 191 Chapter 7 Module specific Information Technical Specifications 1756 0A16l Attribute Current per module max 1756 0A161 5 A 30 C 86 F linear derating 4A 60 C 140 F linear derating Surge current per point 20 A for 43 ms per point repeatable every 2 s 60 C 140 F Load current min 10 mA per point Commutating voltage 4V us for loads gt 50 mA 0 2V us for loads lt 50 mA Isolation voltage 250V continuous basic insulation type outputs to backplane and output to output Routine tested 1350V AC for 2 s Inhibit voltage max Zero crossing 60V peak Removable terminal block 1756 TBCH 1756 TBS6H Slot width 1 Wire size 0 33 2 1 mm 22 14 AWG solid or stranded copper wire rated at 90 C 194 F or greater 1 2 mm 3 64 in insulation max Wire category 18 North American temperature code T4A Enclosure type f The commutating dv dt of the output voltage OUTP The commutating dv dt rating of the module for loads 50 None open style UT to L2 should not exceed 0 2V ms for loads under 50 mA 500 mA OUTPUT to L2
360. x I O and featutes that are specific to diagnostic digital I O modules Diagnostic digital I O modules provide additional reporting information to the controller such as a timestamp of the time a module fault occurs clears no load detection and or a pulse test Topic Page Diagnostic Input Module Compatibility 69 Diagnostic Output Module Compatibility 70 Features on ControlLogix Diagnostic Digital 1 0 Modules 70 Features Specific to Diagnostic Input Modules 78 Features Specific to Diagnostic Output Modules 82 Fault and Status Reporting Between Input Modules and Controllers 93 Fault and Status Reporting Between Output Modules and Controllers 95 Before proceeding we suggest you take a few minutes to review a list of diagnostic digital I O modules Cat No Description 1756 IA8D 79 132V AC 8 point diagnostic input module 1756 IB16D 10 30V DC diagnostic input module 1756 0A8D 74 132V AC 8 point diagnostic output module 1756 0B16D 19 2 30V DC 16 point diagnostic output module When designing a system by using ControlLogix diagnostic input modules you must consider the voltage necessary for your application whether you need a solid state device current leakage if your application should use sinking or sourcing wiring For more information on compatibility of other Allen Bradley Company products to ControlLogix input modules see the I O Products System Overview publication CI
361. y fused per point All other modules Not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs see publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical For details see the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module Installation Instructions publication 1756 IN592 and the ControlLogix Sequence of Events Module User Manual publication 1756 UM528 132 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Module specific Information Chapter 7 Module Type Features 1756 digital contact modules Scheduled outputs Synchronization within 16 7 seconds maximum reference to the Coordinated System Time Configurable fault states per point Hold last state on or off off is default Configurable states in Program mode per point Hold last state on or off off is default Fusing Not protected A fused IFM is recommended to protect outputs See publication 1492 TD008 Module keying Electronic software configurable RTB keying User defined mechanical For the latest 1 0 module specifications see the l 1756 ControlLogix 1 0 Modules Technical Specifications publication 1756 TD002 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 133 Chapter 7 Module specific Information 1756 IA8D ControlLogix AC 79 132V diagnostic input module
362. y firmware revision 3 x If Using a Compatible or Disabled Keying 1 0 Configuration If you are replacing a 2 x module with a 3 x module and have configured the 2 x module to use Compatible or Disabled Keying further steps are not required If you use Compatible or Disabled Keying configurations 3 x modules can be used as a direct replacements for 2 x modules 285 Appendix F 286 Major Revision Upgrades If Using an Exact Match Keying Configuration If you are currently using a 2 x module configured at Exact Match keying consider changing the module s electronic keying in the I O configuration to Compatible or Disabled Keying If you are replacing a 2 x module with a 3 x module and must use Exact Match keying in the I O configuration take additional action depending on your version of RSLogix 5000 software If you use Exact Match keying and RSLogix 5000 software version 13 and later Then do this 1 Delete the 2 x module from the 1 0 Configuration in the RSLogix 5000 software project 2 Add a new 3 x revision module to the 1 0 configuration RSLogix 5000 software version 12 and earlier Do one of the following e Change the module s configuration to Disable Keying Upgrade RSLogix 5000 software to version 13 or later and complete the steps listed for RSLogix software version 13 or later Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010 Appendix G 1492 IFMs for Digital 1 0 Modules
363. z ag N 10 o lo Interface Nonisolated GND 11 G 24 z319 N 11 Wiring GND 12 CD 26 25 N 12 GND 13 amp 28 27 CD N 13 o O _J e GND 14 30 29 N 14 Additional jumper bars may be purchased GND 15 E 32 31 Dy N 15 by using catalog number 1756 JMPR o GND 15 CD 34 33 CD Not Used o Not Used D 36 35 G Not Ysed DC I I 7 Daisy Chain to Other RTBs Technical Specifications 1756 IH161 amp DCINPUT Attribute 1756 1H161 3 Inputs 16 individually isolated ST 012345670 ST 8 9 101112 13 1415K Voltage category 125V DC sink source 8 Operating voltage range 90 146V De Input voltage nom 125V DC Input delay time OFF to ON Hardware delay 2 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 or 2 ms ON to OFF Hardware delay 6 ms max filter time User selectable filter time 0 1 2 9 or 18 ms Current draw 5 1V 125 mA Current draw 24V 3mA Power dissipation max 5 W Q 60 C 140 F Thermal dissipation 17 05 BTU hr Off state voltage max 20V DC Off state current max 0 8 mA On state current min 1 mA 90V DC On state current max 3mA Q 146V DC On state voltage 90 146V DC Derated as follows 90 146V DC Q 50 C 122 F 12 Channels ON 90 132V DC 55 C 131 F 14 Channels ON 90 125V DC Q 60 C 140 F 16 Channels ON 90 146V DC 30 C 86 F 16 Channels ON 164 Publication 1756 UMO058E EN P August 2010

ControlLogix Digital I/O Modules User Manual -...Allen

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents